Home

Chrysler 2006 PT Cruiser Convertible User's Manual

Contents

1. UConnect System Features 147 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 166 Advanced Phone Connectivity 152 Folding Rear Seat Convertible 168 Things You Should Know About Your Tumbling Rear Seat Sedan 169 UConnect System lees 154 Tumbling Rear Seat Convertible 171 hoo Tnm 159 E ENN E E fas a eie eras 175 Front Seat Adjustment 159 E To Open And Close Th Hood cene 177 dub eee NE E dE s aos See aoa tenau ster tuede oes 178 Meee Taser BT a Us sense adesse ns Map Reading Lights Sedan 178 Folding a a s iba Map Reading Lights Convertible 179 Driver socat Back E I Bayipped se cins ad Interior Lights sisse 180 aene Pest Back Tib busy Eudgyoystong Multi Function Control Lever 181 Convertible 2c eee kore RR 163 Adjustable Head Restraints 164 Hessen Rating Signe usemnene ean Lights sasaina deser hen pde ehe dee d 182 Heated Seats If Equipped 165 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Daytime Running Lights DRL Canada Only 182 Tilt Steering Column 0 0 187 Lights On Reminder 000 182 W Traction Control Switch If Equipped 188 Fog Ligh
2. 344 H If Your Engine Overheats 344 H Jacking And Tire Changing 346 Jack Location eicit es tari trs 347 Spare Tire Stowage e srr aa Teeni pada Tar 347 Preparations For Jacking 348 Jacking Instructions 000 349 Bl Jump Starting Procedures Due To A Low Batte casita ced eg nee de ede ee pean odas 351 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces lll Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle ll Convertible Top Manual Override Acceleration sn Traction uisi Ash waa eds With Ignition Key Without The Ignition Key 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Hazard Warning Switch The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Depress the switch and both cluster indicators and all front and rear directional signals will flash Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following
3. 367 Engine Oll sese kr eee Re nr gabe 368 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 372 Spark Plugs 2g Sor dese doe eg esie 372 Ignition Wiring System sess 372 Catalytic Converter Engine Timing Belt Crankcase Emission Control System 374 Fuel Nier in 452082204087 Sao anew ee 374 Air Cleaner Element Filter 374 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery 375 Manual Transaxle secr er nete ani Ena 394 Air Conditioner Maintenance 377 Appearance Care And Protection From Power Steering Fluid Check 378 CCOTTOSIOD cc e RR eR RE QE a e ge 395 Font Suspension Ball Jolie ous eG eene ae 37g M Convertible Top Care 2 2 2 eee eee 400 Body Lubrication 0 0 0 0 0000000 eee 379 i E a Windshield Wiper Blades 0000 379 a E aile qur a Windshield Washer Reservoir 00 380 Cloth Top Additonal Cleaning Procedu ss 02 ExhaustSystem esee 381 Cloth Top Protection 6 402 Cooling EE 382 Weather Strip Care 0 2 2 Ta 402 H ses And Yanun Vapo Eiathesias e oevec 387 H Integrated Power Module IPM 403 Fuel System Connections 2 0 387 W Vehicle Storage Rh 406 S NETT 388
4. 0000 208 Express Open Feature 00 200 Position 2 Middle 0 0 209 Wind Buffeting ise ees 201 Position 3 Floor 0 0 eee eee 209 Sunroof Maintenance 201 Position 4 Vertical llle 210 Bi Electrical Power Outlets llle 201 Position 5 Table eese 210 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 204 W Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 212 Mi Console Features 00 0000 ee eee 204 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION WARNING The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision Therefore it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times when riding in a convertible Studies have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside a vehicle during a collision than to be ejected from the vehicle To Lower The Top NOTE Thoroughly dry the convertible top and top storage area prior to leaving the top lowered for an extended period of time This will help prevent possible mildew build up CAUTION To avoid damage to the convertible top or its com ponents your vehicle is equipped with a feature that prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10 mph 16 km h 122
5. Language Say Priority number of phone to select New phone will temporarily override phone priorities Pairing Complete Note Available Voice commands are shown in bald face and are underlined Select a language English Espanol or Francais B15atdD1 EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 North American English SEATS Primary Alternate s Front Seat Adjustment Zero Oh The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the Add location Add new floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired All All of them position Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts Delete a name Delete Language Select language List names List all List paired phones List phones Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select Set up Phone settings phone set up 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision
6. Rear Shelf Panel Position 4 WARNING When in the vertical position the rear shelf panel should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the cargo area when the seatbacks folded down In an accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occupants causing serious or fatal injury Position 5 table With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved rearward to act as a serving counter 1 Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top rear guides Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into place E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 2 Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and lower the shelf leg Rear Shelf Panel Position 5 Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob WARNING 3 Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as Do not load objects over 100 Ibs 45 kg in position 5 labeled on the rear scuff plate table Failure to follow this warning could cause the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars Use both adjustable crossbars assemblies to support the load and distribute the load as evenly as possible To adjust the crossbars with latch styl
7. Auto Down Feature Rear Window Switches Wind Buffeting ll Occupant Restraints Sedan Lap Shoulder Belts Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag Child Restraint E Occupant Restraints Convertible Lap Shoulder Belts Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag Child Restraint H Engine Break In Recommendations 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se la Safety Tips zd ck ER ape ER RR RE eR n 114 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make T te NR 114 Outside The Vehicle 115 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehi cle e Ey Ru n RR e e 114 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8
8. 004 389 Mirrors 10e wx Ries ae A REOR Bae REOS 133 Electric Remote cee eee eee 135 Outside 12 9 25 dm Pann Gtk pA 2S nadie 134 Rearview sedora nens Pu als Bee geese he aes 133 Vanity ere e RE sere AL EGG 135 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Mopar Parts oec cem Ser E Re 366 443 Multi Function Control Lever 181 New Vehicle Break In Period 113 Occupant Classification System OCS 61 Occupant Restraints Convertible 80 Occupant Restraints Sedan sss 44 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 322 Odometer 22 2 2 esa nkone rs 223 TH ete sea one ne diae EPOR durada oa d s 223 228 Oll Engine oi esa k sk ag e riy es 368 411 Capacity desgai aei hee Bee ae OE RR eo 411 Change Interval ee eer 369 Checking Disposal 458 INDEX aa Iter 3 ione et eR b af cda e i AR 371 Identification Logo eee 370 Materials Added to 0000 371 Quality usse swe RR CRUS 370 Recommendation llle 370 411 SyntlietiG s essei e ox rere REE AES 371 VISCOSILY zieissesergeo 9 Re2mfeg coy eris 370 Oil Pressure Light iliiiieeeess 227 Onboard Diagnostic System 364 365 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 192 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Air Intake llle 272 Overdrive vega ore ERI edo eh metre 288 Overheating ENGINE i sss kae Re 344 O
9. 0 240 248 Rear Liftgate Sedan sai sensiando 38 Rear Seat Folding 166 168 169 171 Rear Seat Removal 0 0 00 cee eee 175 Rear Shelf Panel ce nee 207 Rear Window 0 00 eee ni 44 Rear Window Defroster sess 273 Rear Window Features 004 273 Rear Wiper Washer isses 186 274 Recorder Event Data llle 70 103 Recreational Towing 0 0 000 0006 340 Retrigerant on ocio Sureste pies 378 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000005 54 88 Remote Keyless Entry Convertible 31 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 24 Replacement Bulbs 0000005 407 Replacement Keys llle 16 Replacement Parts 366 Replacement Tires llle 318 Reporting Safety Defects 04 443 Restraints Child ilius 72 78 105 111 Restraints Infant ceesre rires ce eee 72 106 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 212 Rotation Tires 2 0 ee 321 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 460 INDEX aa Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 115 Safety Defects Reporting llle 443 Safety Information Tire 302 Dalety TIPS cce A ete a Bie each eg CORTE Gene S 114 Satellite Radio 0 0 ee ee eee 261 Satellite Radio Antenna lille 265 Schedule Maintenance 0000 416 Seat Belt Maintenance 00000000 400 Sea
10. 000 280 Brake Transmission Interlock System 285 Manual Transaxle esses 280 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System 285 Normal Starting iss cR Pe E ER RES 280 Four Speed Automatic Transaxle 285 Extremely Cold Weather Reset Mode 2 22 86 45 m eR radii 285 Below 20 F Or 29 C 0 0 0 00004 281 Gear Ronges for Tovi Speed Anoma If Engine Fails To Start 281 Transaxle 2469444242404 Co4e0F04o44 pat 286 After Starine cvs sod ae x oat tee area ech 282 i AutoStick If Equipped 289 Turbocharger Cool Down 282 AutoStick Operation sa crs ress 289 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se AutoStick General Information 289 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 307 Bl Manual Transaxle Operation 290 WMiTires General Information 311 24 Liter Turbo If Equipped 292 Tire Pressure s gue Led uec he eh d 311 Recommended Shift Speeds 292 Tire Inflation Pressures 312 Downshifting 6 0 6 6 0 00 e eee ee 293 Radial Ply Tires 000005 314 B Parking Brake 0000000 294 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 315 B Brake System 0 eee 296 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 316 Anti Lock
11. 333 TOP COVED uus does epe sana saa RR IRR ROS OR RR S 126 TOWING x egcbeecedie du soa iex aded ene dob woe dene n 329 Disabled Vehicle llle 355 Guide s rreme Ie PRADA P egg eve 332 en INDEX 463 Recreational 0 0 0 0 cee ee es 340 Weight sessa cete DER be PIRE 332 racho 354 0 Meee we oe E we 354 Traction Control s02 fin akawie saa ease cia ad 188 300 Traction Control Switch less 188 300 Trailer Towing llle 329 Cooling System Tips 000 340 Hitches desea E Site ONAN Oe 332 Minimum Requirements 334 Trailer and Tongue Weight 333 Wiring 2oizkcakm 9 RE ROC REY 338 Trailer Towing Guide sesos ie assisi tasr 332 Trailer Weight cie OE REI EERPTES 332 VTransaxle og es td ERE dr aed NOR Eie 284 Automatic llle 13 280 284 391 Autostck scu pa ace E PX XU CERRO 289 Marital 3 2 x Siete X ee 14 280 290 Operation dod eder desgracia o sod saai 284 OVerdtive 139534304 624 00d d E PEDE wae E 288 Selection of Lubricant less 391 Transmission Range Indicator llle 223 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 000 30 35 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 192 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transporting Pets llle Tread Wear Indicators lrip OdOmetet iacu oe node PAESE ERE Trip Odometer Reset Button Trunk Lid Deck Lid Convertible
12. At the next prompt say Delete The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to delete You can also press the 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number of the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e UConnect phone
13. Tumbling Rear Seat Convertible Tumbling Rear Seat Sedan Turbo Cool Down Turn Signals 444 2 exu hex nee ad Understanding Your Instrument Panel 464 INDEX BEEN Uniform Tire Quality Grades 445 Universal Transmitter 00000000 192 Unleaded Gasoline llle 322 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 52 86 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 0000 387 Vanity Mirrors casia Sa GSD ee 135 Variance Compass 1 anaana aar 235 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 00000 308 329 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 6 eee 406 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 36 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 222 Warnings and Cautions Warranty Information oe sostrai name es 443 Washer Adding Fluid 187 275 Washer Rear lle 274 Washers Windshield aaaea 184 Washing Velucleu i2 e ee ao Se e ees 395 Wheel Alignment and Balance 319 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 396 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care su 397 Wind Buffeting 0 ee eee eee 44 201 Window Fogging 0 6 eee 272 MWindOWS cua cs ede vee ark ews ini 42 Windshield Washers 0000000 184 Windshield Wipers 00000 184 379 Wiper Blade Replacement 379 Wiper Rear 52 odores d Pid et ee ti 274 Wipers Interm
14. z II i CIL 4 S 5 LI amp 1355bb1 RAO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button
15. 3 Program Each Transmitter All transmitters to be used with your vehicle must be programmed as follows Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simulta neously followed by a press and release of ANY button on each transmitter to be programmed You will hear a chime when a transmitter has been successfully programmed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 General Information This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation If your Remote Keyless Entry fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonic CR2032 or equivalent 1 Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar 2 object Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket material during removal p Separating Transmitter Halves 81182072 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteri
16. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the following conditions exist e The lubricant has become contaminated with water If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately e If severe usage has occurred refer to Maintenance Schedule B in Section 8 of this manual ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under
17. body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges and to protect your paint finish Take care never to of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and scratch the paint open e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is finish considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the pai
18. the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both t
19. 14 13 12 1110 24 9 8 18 15 B161bI55 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TURBO 100 120 40 8 120 10 ps zug i FM 101 1 10 a 23 25 22 10 21 17 16 14 13 12 1110 24 9 8 18 15 B161bisc 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the front passenger s right side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem TEL perature Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling sys
20. 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting
21. 39 Deck Lid Emergency Release Latch Convertible 41 Electric Rear Window Defrost Deck Lid Power Release 0000 40 Electric Remote Mirrors lessen Defroster Rear Window aan 273 Electrical Power Outlets 000 Defroster Windshield 115 268 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Delay Intermittent Wipers 185 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 452 INDEX BEEN Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch Convertible 41 Emergency In Case of JACKING cece ok werd re eR m ECRIRE Oe 346 Jump Starting erek noae e eee 351 TOWNE 05 hea 43hh09 ba eee ote ee 355 Emergency Seat Back Release Sedan 40 Emission Control System Maintenance 365 416 Engine derea a ey Reap PR US Eon 362 363 Break In Recommendations 113 Checking Oil Level 0 000 368 CODIIIB saccus e Pace esa erae ss 382 Exhaust Gas Caution sosire erpinetan pa 325 Fuel Requirements 000 322 Jump Starting ice acea nean e RR ace es 351 Oil PERPE 368 411 412 Oil Change Interval 004 369 Oil Fille Cap 2 6220 82 20 002263 362 363 370 Oil Filter sente t ord CERE E E RUE 412 Oil Selection 42a bP A e PASS HES Be 370 OilSynthetie isst nsu ails eee chis 371 Overheating s cest preciese esiis ritas 344 Temperature Gauge escea rara Tamet eee eee 222 Timing Belt 22e nestr adian 374
22. If equipped with a center cap that covers the wheel nuts pry off the cap using the small end of the lug wrench To reinstall the cap make sure it is properly lined up before pushing it on to the wheel 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the crossmember below the radiator on the front sus pension crossmember or on the rear axle assembly 3 There are two front jacking locations on each side of the body and rear jacking locations located on the trailing arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol Turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed FRONT REAR Jacking Locations B c4T55b 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wh
23. Manual Transmission Fluid Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 416 Schedule A Non Turbo E Maintenance Schedule Ls 416 Schedule A Turbo cess Schedule B All Engines 419 CO MmreoemMm zon mo2Z2zr2zama2z2z reZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on
24. ON or OFF appears to make your selection es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in this section Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system DVD video system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the U Connect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US o
25. The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual Selecting Satellite Mode in REF and RAQ Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display AC
26. prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry t
27. single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee PASSENGER AIRBAG DRIVER AIRBAG INFLATABLE KNEE BLOCKER Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allo
28. slowly This shows that the system is fully armed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To disarm the system Security System Manual Override Unlock a front door liftgate using the Keyless Entry The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the Transmitter manual door lock plunger Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm the system A valid key is one that is programmed to that particular vehicle A valid key will disarm the system an invalid key will trigger the alarm Tamper Alert If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter the alarm has been activated Check the vehicle for tamper ing p 21600860 Door Lock Plunger 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se LIFTGATE SEDAN NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate if equipped Rotate the key and pull the liftgate up To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right If equipped the liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release touch pad lo
29. such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters
30. wheels by engaging the brake on the wheel that is losing traction When this occurs the TRAC indicator light located above the instrument cluster odometer will flash The system operates at speeds below CAUTION 35 mph 56 km h Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Traction Control Switch A push button at the center of the instrument panel below the radio turns the Traction Control System ON or OFF The system is always in the ON mode unless e The TRAC OFF switch has been used to turn the system off e There is a Anti Lock Brake System malfunction e There is a Traction Control System malfunction e The system has been automatically deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated Ex brake temperatures NOTE Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC OFF Light located in the instrument cluster 302 STARTING AND OPERATING This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition The system will remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC OFF light If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud ice or snow turn the Traction Control
31. 126 130 Convertible Top aces Eon RES ER 121 Convertible Top Maintenance 400 Convertible Top Manual Override 132 357 Cool Down Turbo 0 00 eee 282 Coolant Antifreeze llle 411 412 Cooling System serrar eka e RR e 382 Adding Coolant Antifreeze Ls 384 Coolant Level llle 382 385 Disposal of Used Coolant 385 en INDEX 451 Drain Flush and Refill Ln 383 Diagnostic System Onboard 364 Inspecton exc m e yx opissa ks 385 Dimmer Switch Headlight 183 Points to Remember 384 386 Disposal Pressure Cap at its se dete Y RIA CHI Reg 384 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 385 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 383 Engine Oll a cia ee ke et Res 371 Corrosion Protection 0 000 e eee 395 Door Locks 2 42 25 4a sex X oa bee ard 18 Crankcase Emission Control System 374 Door Locks Automatic esse 20 Cruise Light ue cime Ree CRAT ROPUR S 223 Door Opener Garage llle 192 Cup Holder sss eoo genes eee Rn 204 Downshifting eee 293 Customer Assistance leen 440 Drive Belts leen 372 Drivers Seat Back Tilt lille 163 Data Recorder Event llle 70 103 Driving Dealer Service 2 0 ccc ee eee 367 On Slippery Surfaces i i netu 353 Deck Lid Convertible lessen
32. 5 239 AM Reception ceric 0 0 00 e cece eee 239 FM Reception 6 6 6 6 0 00 aea eee eee 239 ll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 240 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 240 Operation Instructions CD Mode 244 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 246 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 247 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio JF Equipped naa cire xev 248 H Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Vehicle Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play scum me eR Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play ker BRE RS Notes On Playing MP3Files Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play 000000 Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play H Satellite Radio If Equipped System Aclivatiori 2v d RR DPR Ren es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Reception Quality 00 265 IUBE oe Snake wi hoe 262 WCD DVD Disc Maintenance 00 0 265 d
33. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their
34. Bi Replacement Bulbs 000 e eens 407 W Bulb Replacement seen 408 Automatic Transaxle sos es seresre srr r eri 391 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Headlight Bulb Replacement 408 Center High Mounted Stop Light 410 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lights 409 W Fluids And Capacities 411 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 409 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 412 Tail Stop And Rear Turn Signal Lights 410 Engine as ya e be Re Rede EU Rate d 412 Back Up Light Bulb 00 410 Chassis uses 9 e E RQPREEEG d Rua 413 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 4L TURBO ENGINE COMPARTMENT ENGINE WASHER COOLANT BRAKE MASTER AIR CLEANER OIL FILL BOTTLE BOTTLE CYLINDER FILTER am COOLANT POWER STEERING ENGINE OIL BATTERY PRESSURE CAP FLUID DIPSTICK 8158ad02 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 2 4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT WASHEH POWER STEERING COOLANT BRAKE MASTER AIR CLEANER BOTTLE FLUID CHECK BOTTLE CYLINDER FILTER m BATTERY COOLANT ENGINE ENGINE OIL AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE LOCATED UNDER PRESSURE CAP OIL FILL FLUID CHECK FLUID CHECK AIR CLEANER BOX acaso 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the
35. Brake System ABS If Equipped 297 Tire Spinning ae a eG ee ee ee 316 Mi Power Steering 22 esses RR RS 299 Tread Wear Indicators 4 222 xxr xen 317 H Traction Control If Equipped 300 HO OL TIE garara tentan eun in 318 la Tire Safety Information 6 0 m m 302 Replacement Tires 000000 318 Tire Markings ise E ga eta hs 302 Alignment And Balance 319 Tire Identification Number TIN 300 W Tire Chains 0 0 eee eee 320 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 E Snow Tires i eee ean el ae ek ea RU 320 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 328 Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations 321 B Vehicle Loading 000000005 329 B Fuel Requirements ciues wey aer EN ove x 322 W Trailer Towing osos e ERES 329 2 4L Standard Engine And 2 4L Standard Common Towing Definitions 330 Turbo Engite eie RR EY 322 Trailer Hitch Classification 332 2 4L High Output Turbo Engine 322 Ref lated Gasoli 323 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer EE WASOME aie ieee Rene se Weight Ratings riein rarena una nE Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 323 Trailer And Tongue Weight MMT In Gasoline 0000008 324 Towing Requirements lle ials Added To Fuel 24
36. C E S C H E D U L E S 8 KJ K X gt lt OX M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 SCHEDULE A CTURBO ME Miles 90 000 95 000 100 000 105 000 Kilometers 144 000 156 000 160 000 168 000 Months 108 114 120 126 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Adjust the generator drive belt tension X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not required if X previously changed Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months X Replace the Make up air filter X Replace the engine timing belt X en SCHEDULE A TURBO 437 Miles 110 000 115 000 120 000 Kilometers 177 000 185 000 193 000 Month 132 138 144 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X Rotate tires X X X Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer WARNING to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a i This maintenance is not required if previously
37. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 2 Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two outside buttons Release the buttons when the light in the Universal Transceiver begins to flash about 20 seconds NOTE Step 2 does not have to be followed to program additional hand held transmitters 3 Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons to program Place the hand held controller one to three inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its indicator light in view EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 8133cdc9 HomeLink Programming Sedan HomeLink Programming Convertible 4 Using both hands press the hand held transmitter button and the desired Universal Transceiver button Do not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed NOTE Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed under Canadian Programming 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will begin to flash first slowly and then rapidly The rapid flashing indicates successful programming If after 90 seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes out return to step 1 and repeat the procedure To train the other buttons repeat steps 3 and 4 Be sure to k
38. INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode TIME Button Auxili
39. Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Battery Replacement 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the rubbing alcohol screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during together Jm NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug S1182c72 Separating Transmitter Halves ee TH
40. Locks A door lock switch is on each front door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors The transmission is in gear 1 2 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC if equipped section of this manual for details Power Door Lock Switch Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 5 Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors Power Door Lock Switch 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Auto Unlock The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 1 The Auto Unlock
41. MEE LE Towing Tips lt isses 339 IONS ex ug d Ru REOR was 24 Poea P EAG i lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 340 i HSS 2 ha hath owe 3 2 Spon enone vins RS Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle BE Adding Fuel zeuoteecpee x MERE C RH 326 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 eee eee 326 Ground vaccas c es e erg bee d 340 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Automatic Transaxle The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of Park Manual Transaxle Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear selector in NEUTRAL NOTE The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a
42. Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
43. See page 364 for more information 10 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever NOTE Turn signal bulbs are located in the Instrument Panel See page 183 for more information 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Iraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera m tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped See page 300 for more information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 12 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anti lock brake system The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp corn
44. UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using Press the Phone button to begin 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands w
45. VEHICLE Se 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure To Program Additional Transmitters NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster the transmitters may also be programmed through the EVIC display Up to 8 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle To obtain additional transmitters contact your authorized dealer To program a transmitter within 23 50 feet 7 15 meters of the vehicle perform the following procedure 1 Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the vehicle including any transmitters that are currently programmed 2 Enter Program Mode Turn the ignition to the ON position and using a currently programmed transmitter press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button for at least 1 second Release both buttons simultaneously
46. a MMC M NN gg H Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 266 Selecting a Channel EE 263 la Climate Controls e equ tagant ns REPE ER Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 264 Bliss CORDES Operating l IpS vie rettere Bee ees Using The PTY Program Type Button lf Equipped succum RR eR RR Rt 264 W Rear Window Features 273 PTY Button Scan 2 as taa 264 Electric Rear Window Defroster 273 PTY Button Seek 2 svo du rt ERG 264 Rear Wiper Washer Switch If Equipped 274 Satellite Antenna 00000 265 Adding Washer Fluid 275 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 2 16 L Air Outlets 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Power Window Switches 4 Clock 5 Radia 13 4 1 5 81512 13 1112 10 1412 9 8 fs Assist Handle 7 Glove Compartment 8 Heated Seat Switches 5 Trac OFF Switch 10 Pass Airbag Off Light 7 6 1 Hazard Switch 12 Climate Controls 13 Rear Window Detrost Switch 14 Storage Bin 15 Power Convertible Switch 16 Power Mirror Switch Bi5f amp blc UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE ZED et OA 18 0 R LE 22 10 21 f 13 12 1110 24 9 8 20 19 18 15 B1G1bi4b 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM FM 101 1 10 23 22 10 21 17 16
47. and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Section 7 See page 368 for more information 22 High Beam Indicator This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 23 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages See page 229 for more information 24 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Knob Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 25 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will switch between the different EVIC functions See page 229 for more information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC 1f Equipped amp 8185415d1 EVIC Location The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the lower left part of the clus
48. as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations EE STARTING AND OPERATING 299 e anda slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be
49. be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Sentry Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds
50. booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accomodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Air
51. digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin Aft
52. drea Ge es Tene qe Ls 182 Heated Seats lt 2 sues pr P x a 165 Hitches Trailer Towing seisanta teed niay punyai 332 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 192 Hood Release 22 02 20 ll ER I 177 Hoses i2 d diner iperen i XE 387 lemon serseri d eh 3oeEET Beas bees aoe Gd 13 KEY ucc xce o a e D oe Ye Se Dti eade Pese eed 13 Wiring System icowie eese E a ede t eet 372 Ignition Key Removal esses 13 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 15 37 Infant Restraint 0 0 00 0 eee eee 72 106 Information Center Vehicle 05 229 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 133 Instrument Cluster 0 00000 eee 219 222 en INDEX 455 Instrument Panel and Controls 218 Instrument Panel Cover 005 399 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 400 Integrated Power Module 403 Interior Appearance Care 004 398 Interior Lights ciel a oon eee ee as 180 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 185 Inttod ction esus eek odes eee Ea as 4 Jack Locatii 2 seen EE rx HE 347 Jack Operation llle 346 349 Jacking Instructions 0000 349 Jump Starting i e es Ere ex HEE reses 351 Key Programming lt c 2s ee bi asad sens 17 Key Replacement llle 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer esses etiese ha 15 Key In Reminder 20 cc ce emn 15 Keyless Entry System Convertible 31 Keyless Entry S
53. drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather If you are required to drive with the deck lid open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE Gas props support the deck lid in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the deck lid in cold weather Power Deck Lid Release You can open the deck lid by pressing the Remote Keyless Entry Button or from inside the vehicle using the switch located inside the glove box On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the power deck lid release switch is disabled if the doors are locked or if vehicle speed exceeds 0 mph 0 km h or when the clutch pedal is depressed On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the power deck lid release switch is disabled if the doors are locked or the trans mission is out of PARK EMERGENCY SEAT BACK RELEASE SEDAN WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 Top or position 2 Middle either by climbing into the liftgate from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the liftgate when your vehicle is unattended Once in the liftgate area young chil dren may not
54. easier 1 Locate the training button on the garage door motor head unit The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer If you have difficulty in locating the training button check your garage door opener manual or call 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com 2 Press and hold the training button on the garage door opener head unit This will activate the training light NOTE After completing step 2 you have 30 seconds to start step 3 3 Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and firmly press and release the garage door button Press and release the button a second time to complete the training process Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training Your garage door opener should now recognize your Universal Transceiver The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done Refer to the Programming instructions You may use either your Universal Transceiver or your original hand held transmitter to open you garage door Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian frequency laws and the technology of some entry gates require you to press and release the hand held transmitter button every two seconds during pro gramming Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver button while you press and release the hand held trans mitter button until the frequency sig
55. emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the messag
56. for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3 seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts
57. goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor J Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side a window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost QU Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem
58. head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the button and push down on the head restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 xu a 2 Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver s and passenger s seats The control for the heater is located on the instru ment panel below the radio After turning on the igni tion you may choose OFF HIGH or LOW heat settings An indicator on the switch shows which setting has been E chosen i Adjustable Head Restraints Heated Seat Switch 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illu minated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after about 30 minutes of continuous op eration NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within 2 to 3 minutes Folding Rear Se
59. it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push button is out It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju ries and death i150056e CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Door Lock Plunger WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Auto Lock feature is enabled Power Door
60. light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Control Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to Low beam Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Control Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released NOTE If the Multi Function Control Lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS et The wipers and washers are operated by a switch S on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Rotate the control to select the desired wiper speed 81721181 Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while
61. lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles re fer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce dure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned o
62. not cause harmful interference ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp B15d5564 Power Sunroof Switch Turn the Ignition Key to the ACC or ON position press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof switch to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the switch forward Releasing the switch will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the switch is pushed forward again Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position A
63. not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open or use the shelf as a seat Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious or fatal injury Position 1 Top Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the top guides and slide forward Press down on the back Rear Shelf Panel Position 1 f the shelf 1 to lock it into place of the shelf panel to lock it into place WARNING Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 top In an accident objects could strike occupants causing serious or fatal injury es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the middle guides and slide forward Press down on the Do not load objects over 100 Ibs 45 kg in position 2 back of the shelf panel to lock it into place middle Failure to follow this warning could cause the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury E Position 3 Floor Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the bottom guides and slide forward NOTE To carry items that may soil the carpeting the rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position 3 Rear Shelf Panel Position 2 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Position 4 Vertical Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the floor and slide downward Push the shelf panel forward to lock it into place
64. occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance E Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key symbol or battery symbol indicating power source All outlets are protected by a single 15 Amp fuse The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console is a conventional cigar lighter outlet 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There are two optional power outlets One is in the center console armrest lower storage bin Front Power Outlet It will accept a cigar lighter unit which is part of the optional Smokers Package To preserve the heating ele Center Console Power Outlet ment of the cigar lighter unit do not hold the lighter in the heating position As a child safety precaution this outlet is powered by the ignition switch only when the switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY positions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 This outlet is powered directly by the battery regardless of the ignition switch position All accessories connected to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect th
65. operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under con
66. performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The Traction Control System will improve acceleration Continued operation with reduced power steering and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at Service should be obtained as soon as possible the driving front
67. pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING poorly The instability could cause an
68. recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115 Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Chec
69. requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker it signals the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat able Knee Blocker The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position you for the best inter action with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being r
70. side of the to latch the seat Lift the seat back to its upright latched instrument panel position WARNING In an accident you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Hood Release Lever 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Then move the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and slightly to the right and raise the hood Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver s side of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20 cm 8 inches and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Map Reading Lights Sedan These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned ON by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully up
71. size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs Latch Plate to Buckle aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You a
72. snaps are fully engaged j Tucking Boot Under Rail e Engaging Boot Arm Snaps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 4 Engage the boot center section retainer using the tabs 5 Tuck the rear flap of the boot in behind the Upper provided Moulding Engaging Boot Center Section Tucking In Rear Flap 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and Storage 1 Unsnap the snaps and remove the top cover boot 2 Lay the boot cover flat with the center section retainer facing the rear of the car Boot Removed And Laying Flat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 3 First fold the left side of the boot cover to the middle 1 of the boot cover Folding Boot Cover Right Side CAUTION Folding Boot Cover Left Side 4 Second fold the right side of the boot cover to the Do not lay heavy objects on top of the boot or lay the middle fitting it inside the left side of the boot cover and boot on top of sharp pointy objects Damage could store it in the trunk or a dry secure area occur to the boot 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure low battery etc and it is necessary to raise the convertible top perform the following steps 1 Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw which is found in the trunk under the convertible to
73. spark plug for use in your vehicle Ignition Wiring System The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly connected Terminals should be fully seated Cracked damaged or faulty cables should be replaced Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn resulting in possible damage to the converter and the In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning vehicle engine oper
74. swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Connections Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufactures specified Wf tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Section WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and poss
75. that May Be Recorded THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Cruise control status Traction stability control status 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle shou
76. the second detent for headlight operation amp 817e28ca Multi Function Lever Control Lever To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the Multi Function Control Lever up or down Daytime Running Lights DRL Canada Only The high beam lamps will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity whenever the ignition is on the headlamp switch is off engine is running the parking brake is off and the gear shift is in any position except park Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the Multi Function Control Lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the control lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Control Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside
77. the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle and place the Circulation control at 77 AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high A C position full counterclockwise position Set the VERY HOT Mode control at or between 4 and ES Set the temperature control to full cool M After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle turn the Circulation control to z and BA EC roll up the windows Once you are comfortable place the Circulation control at c and adjust the temperature control for confort WARM WEATHER Set the Circulation control t 27 73 rer If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near s and turn the air conditioning on If Pro its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near ue E31 COOL OR COLD Set the Circulation control to 2 3 HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between J and then turn the air anette conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 and tum 8466 A the air conditioning on COLD DRY Set the Circulation control to y CONDITIONS
78. the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an acci dent Have the vehicle checked immediately EE STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu conditions The system automatically pumps the ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent can it increase braking or steering efficiency b
79. the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor as the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates that the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode Pull on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH into the buckle with the release button facing out Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt Both rear seating positions have exclusive lower anchorages located at the rear of the seat cushio
80. the convertible top to the full down position Pressing and holding the switch in the second detent position will lower all four windows completely and the top to the full down posi tion Convertible Top Switch 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Continue pressing the Power Top Switch until the To Raise The Top convertible top is lowered completely 5 Install the Convertible Top Boot Cover if equipped Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation If Equipped in this section To avoid damage to the convertible top or its com ponents your vehicle is equipped with a feature that prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10 CAUTION mph 16 km h Damage to the convertible top boot cover could result if the latch handle is not completely closed when the top is lowered The convertible top boot CAUTION cover cannot be installed while the latch handle is open To fully insure that no damage occurs be sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear selector in the Park position automatic transaxle or in the Neutral position manual transaxle before lowering or raising the top A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 1 Remove the convertible top boot cover if equipped Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and Stor age in this section 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position 3 Press the Power Top Switch to raise the top Before the top reaches t
81. the inside door lock is in the unlocked position Child Lock Control 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down window and open the door with the outside door handle REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SEDAN LOCK UNLOCK 81322725 Three Button Transmitter This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
82. then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact 2 your dealer for details General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage
83. this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B ALL ENGINES Second is Schedule A NON TURBO It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule B ALL ENGINES Third is Schedule A TURBO It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule B ALL ENGINES Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully opernu warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu proper fit racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark At Each Oil Change s Ghede the windshield washer solvent and add jf CBee The engine oil filter required e Inspect the exhaust system Once a Month e Inspect the brake hoses e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo damage n
84. tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X X X Replace the Make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 SCHEDULE A CTURBO ME replaced at 100 000 miles Miles 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 Kilometers 56 000 64 000 72 000 80 000 88 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not X en SCHEDULE A TURBO 435 Miles 60 000 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 Kilometers 96 000 104 112 120 128 136 000 000 000 000 000 Months 72 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not required if previously changed t Replace the Make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension M A l N T E N A N
85. to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Check
86. to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dim mer control is in this position With the ignition key in the OFF position the interior lights will automatically turn 809356 Off in about 10 minutes if the dimmer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 control is left in the Dome light position or a door is left open The interior lights will remain on for only 90 seconds for all occurrence after that until the engine is turned on and off Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the ex treme bottom OFF position The in terior lights will remain off when the doors are open 8Dg3eGUe Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature O Rotate the dimmer control to the first a detent white semi circle This feature brightens the odometer and radio dis play when the parking lights or head lights are on during daylight condi OFF tions B083e650 Multi Function Control Lever The Multi Function Control Lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the Multi Function Control Lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to
87. transaxle Manual Transaxle Your vehicle may be towed if the gearshift lever is in NEUTRAL If the transaxle is not operative the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground All Transaxles CAUTION If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi tion not in the LOCK positions Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing vehicle to flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle it may be towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the transaxle is in neutral If the ignition key is not available vehicles with auto matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE If y
88. treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Cruise control status Traction stability control status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that E small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics childr
89. tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable
90. vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 CAUTION STORAGE Center Console Armrest Storage Bin e Many accessories that can be plugged into the 12 volt power outlet draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine start ing Accessories that draw higher power such as cool ers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution 81 Stes After the use of high power draw accessories or 9 99990 em eee long periods of the vehicle not being started Sliding Armrest with accessories still plugged in the vehicle The center console provides a sliding armrest with two must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow unique storage compartments under the lid the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M m Sliding Armrest Storage Bins Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise the upper cover Inside is a slot for a power cord an area to store a cell phone and other miscellaneous items Push the low
91. warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no
92. when the system is in operation ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel amp 17e1aad Speed Controls L or R To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever While in the AutoStick mode speed control will only operate in third and fourth gear To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control witho
93. your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push up or down on the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best Ld Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a shoulder belt fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point Creating A Fold Positioning Latch Plate E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate Sliding The Latch Plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both fr
94. your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE There are three maintenance schedules that show re quired service for your vehicle First is Schedule B ALL ENGINES It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing t en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice t e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B AIl Engines of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B AIl Engines of the Maintenance Sched ules section of
95. 00000 cease 392 Interlock System llle 18 285 Reset Mode 3 204844 492 cana 3D s 285 Selection Of Lubricant 000005 391 Shif ng rererere tented oet er die epe 286 en INDEX 449 Special Additives 0000 394 Atttostick i4 ei o yg 289 Back Up Lights ise est Rh SERPENS RS 410 BallJomts oi s c0s Re dees Geese Sees 378 Battery osse mhi oe ares ayes cote ee 375 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 30 35 Belts Drive usri iedig RA ES AR 372 Belts Engine sc atts ise beni So Y end a erat 374 Body Mechanism Lubrication 379 Boot Convertible Top 00 126 130 B Pillar Location ves ne VE a ee a 8 307 Brake Fluid 4562259 8 tapini kerei 413 Brake Parking aas doce Bala Sane ae are ane 294 Brake System s sos pes todd see el tr nen 296 388 Anti Lock ABS acce ke RR dn 297 HOSS ieu RR ERreec e pe eR RUPES 388 Master Cylinder 1 osse etre eR ans 389 Parking ie eo Re dtr eadie PS IPIS 294 Warning Light ici ib ce ea s 225 Brakes aua dd mp uA dur Eu EA PS Rad 296 388 Brake Transmission Interlock 285 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 113 Bulb Replacement 0000000 407 408 Bulbs Light sege esteem teed RE Rea 407 Calibration Compass 0 000000 00 237 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 411 Capacities Fluid 00 22 411 Caps Filler Fuels vc tae e bore eae Bd ae ee a aie 326 Oil Engin
96. 1182d3d Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift knob push button has returned to the out position Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transaxle If Equipped Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK po
97. 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation Rear Window Wiper Washer Sedan Models Only A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the ON position will activate the wiper Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position B17a1f81 Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer If Equipped is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and opera
98. 7 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate Sliding The Latch Plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten sioners both must be replaced 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also i
99. AND OPERATING 295 NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position cae or Parking Brake Lever When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicle WARNING e Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear selector Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding
100. D may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations
101. During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park With a manual transmission shift the transmission into reverse Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distribu
102. E 33 The Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce dure To Unlatch the Deck Lid Press the Rear Release button twice to unlatch the deck lid Panic Alarm The panic mode flashes the park lights and sounds the horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
103. Event Data Recorder 0005 70 103 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 114 325 381 Exhaust System 2 0 ce eee 381 Filler Location Fuel 0 00000005 222 Filters Air Cleaner bac ec btn hed ee Rx 3G EY 374 Engine Fuel ek ve e RR E see 374 Engine Ol as assed ai Sheed RR 371 412 Flashers sictt ecard Ses daen dnd Lie a donee hee 344 Hazard Warning 2223404434 22i44448 Xe AS 344 Flat TireStowage 6 0 eee eee 351 Flooded Engine Starting 281 Fluid Brake ae reae aa RO RR 413 Fluid Capacities i e ik oL RP 3 411 en INDEX 453 Fluid Leaks llle 115 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle liliis 392 Eli ds inre eL E OR ee 412 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 412 Fog Light Service Jesns n loeis 409 Fog Lights ike 24a needed t RES aes 183 227 Folding Front Passenger Seat 162 Folding Rear Seat 00000 166 168 Folding Rear Seat Convertible 168 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 0 166 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 040 354 Fuel gereken a a ne es ee ae ee 322 412 Adding Lisutatesoemaut Mat ee aed a Tes vans 326 Additives cassi Se oh Poot de OPES ESS ed 324 Capacity ek Reed ea 411 Clean Ati segrare aaaea Ce ECCE GOR ace 323 Filler Cap Gas Cap isses 222 326 Filler Door Gas Cap 0220000 222 Filtet ue ect teat cal ty yi EE a s ee ol hs 374 Ga
104. G Itis dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehiclehas Someone or something Only shift into gear when come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle the engine is idling normally and when your right speed foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal en STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC positions Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will function normally except you may be able to shift the vehicle from PARK without depressing the brake pedal If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Igniti
105. G YOUR VEHICLE Se As a security measure an emergency deck lid release lever is built into the deck lid latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark lever attached to the deck lid latching mecha nism See following picture Emergency Deck Lid Release Handle POWER WINDOWS The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel above the radio The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger s window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger s window The sedan has a window lock switch located between the window switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located at the back of the center floor console THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 The convertible has an All windows up and All windows down switch located between the window switches instead of the lock switch Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s and passenger s front window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch pas
106. ING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended
107. ING YOUR VEHICLE 85 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Seat Belt Webbing Guide NOTE The manufacturer recommends that the seat belt is routed through the seat belt webbing guide when using the seatbelt The seat belt webbing guide should be used to improve seat belt accessibility The seat belt can be removed from the guide to allow for easier access to the rear seats Seat Belt Webbing Guide 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a shoulder belt fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point Creating A Fold Positioning Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8
108. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CONVERTIBLE 81584135 Four Button Transmitter This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or open the deck lid from distances of 23 50 feet 7 15 meters using a transmitter You don t have to point the transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system Each vehicle comes with two transmitters To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and h
109. Phonebock Francais Last Enter Enter Number The 32 name language UE See Setup Number Name an Phone specific phonebook will be Fleiwchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number Number associated is Dialed with entry is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined amp 15a55tc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Mb any e Enter Name ist Confirmation Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number Phonebook Enter lamber is played o Sid New Entry Added Enter New New Entry Delete Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819315204 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts Toggle Confirmation Prompts F YOUR VEHICLE Say 4 digit on off pin cade System Phones Lists Say Priority Start Painng procedure on phone See phone s owner manual Enter Name af phone Assigr Priority of phone 1 to Y 1 having highest priority number of phane to delete Phone Deleted All T System confirms E se All Phones Deleted List Phones System Lists Phones Select Phone
110. Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to select You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played then say the priority number of the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing
111. R WINDSHIELU WIPER TEMPERATURE AHD WASHER C i LOWER ANCHORS MALFURCTIOR AND TETHER FOR SUPPLEMENTAL IHPAZATOR LIGHT CHILDREN LATCH RESTRAINT SYSTEM d BRAKE SYSTEM HIGH BEAM HORM UPPER AI OUTLET ESTED SEAT WARMING t t LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER ANE LOWER HEATED SEAT FARURE OF ANTHLOCK POWER OUTLET dag OUTLET oH BRAKING W TE ki A SEAT BELT 49 c RELIRGULATIIN D FRONT FOG LH3HT HIKJD RELEABE X C LOWER AIR GuTLET E LIFTGATE RELEASE DEFROBT AND VENTILATING FAN enepd que aoe LOWER Ali OUTLET x D 4 3 POME LICHT SLIDING DDOR TAUMK DECK RELEASE Al CONDATIONINGE SIDE ARRAS SO CE i A EMERGENCY HAZARD PAAR LIGHTS Sues DOGA CONVERTIBLE TOP WP RELEASE HANDLE A PASSENGER WINDY LOCK LKiHTER DODA AJAR EQMVERTIBLE TOC DCN AIRBAG OFF INTRODUCTION 5 A ADJUETAELE PEDALS e MW INDEN LIFT TIRE PRESSURE am ms CONVERTIBLE WOKE RECOGHITHIN 4 WINDOON OC BUTTON Q or POWER UcONNECT BUTTON STEERING FLUID o m TRACTION CONTROL INSTUMENT PAWEL WARNING ILLUMI WATON Fy ESP j BAS I ELECTRONIG ETABILITY TER LKZHTIMI PROGRAM BRAKE is Farch E ASSIST SYSTEM Bid2ccfdb 6 INTRODUCTION EE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If
112. Replace the Make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension X X lt OX M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Flush and replace the engine coolant if not re X placed at 60 months M 432 SCHEDULE A CNON TURBO M Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 l Kilometers 180 000 190000 200 000 m Months 108 114 120 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X fam Rotate tires X X X E Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary t X im Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the engine timing belt X fay Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not done at X DE 102 000 miles i Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X Replace the Make up air filter X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer Inspection and service should also be performed anytime to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re sions warranty ceipts i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced EN SCHEDULE A TURBO 433 SCHEDULE A TURBO Miles 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 Kilometers 8 000 16 000 24 000 32 000 40 000 48 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate
113. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cc ewe cece hm n n n 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cece eee cece reece cece hh hn Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cece screener ere rc reves evesseresevesece e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ccc cece cree ccc n ccc n cee ec ce nn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cece cece cece cree reer eee e hh hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc ccc cece cnc ETEISEEN 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 2 ccc cccc cece hh hh mnn 10 INDEX 55 0355 9 aco mea Ree a nel 319 e Pda bite os ar Ros aS arta ie noise oso Sine ria ie c9 8 0 E E 8 820 8 0 E qua 009 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS H introduction 0 0 0 0 cee eee 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 WM Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyab
114. Set the Mode control at or near p If itis sunny you may want more upper air In A this case set the Mode control at or between F and 7 In very cold weather Etc odes if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 8175298 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows use the A C PANEL and blower controls Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging use the Outside Air position Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of i
115. System Off before attempting to rock the vehicle free TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 81154468 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Ti
116. TED POWER MODULE IPM An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside of the cover Integrated Power Module Location Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Fuse 1 40 Amp Power Top Feed Green 2 20 Amp Yellow AWD ECU Feed 3 10 Amp Red CHMSL Brake Switch Feed 4 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed 5 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow 6 10 Amp Red IOD Sw Pwr Mir Ocm Steer ing Cntrl Sdar Hfm 7 30 Amp Green IOD Sensel 8 30 Amp Green IOD Sense2 9 40 Amp Power Seats Green 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Fuse Fuse 10 20 Amp Yellow CCN Power 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Con Locks Green tact PWR Feed 11 15 Amp Lt Power Outlet 19 20 Amp Yelow PWR Amp 1 amp Blue Amp 2 Feed 12 20 Amp Yellow Ign Run Acc In 20 15 Amp Lt IOD Feed Radio verter Blue 13 20 Amp Yellow Pwr run Acc 21 10 Amp Red IOD Feed Intrus Outlet RR Mod Siren 14 10 Amp Red IOD CCN Inte 22 10 Amp Red IGN RUN Hvac rior Lighting Compass Sensor 15 50 Amp RAD Fan Relay 23 15 Amp Lt ENG ASD Relay Red Battery Feed Blue Feed 3 16 15 Amp Lt IGN Run Acc 24 25 Amp Natu PWR Sunroof Blue Cigar Ltr ral Feed Sunroof 25 10 A
117. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION To fully insure that no damage occurs be sure that To avoid damage to either the top or the rear win the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear dow check the top storage area at the rear of the selector in the Park position automatic transaxle or vehicle interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or in the Neutral position manual transaxle before other items Be sure that child seat flip up bars are lowering or raising the top lowered Do not use the top storage area for other storage purposes CAUTION NOTE When closing the convertible top all windows will drop slightly from the full up position Do not operate the convertible top with ice or snow build up on the top Damage to the top may occur 1 Turn the ignition key to the ON position 2 Release the top from the windshield header by pulling down on the latch handle and turning the latch handle clockwise until it stops es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 HERE Releasing Convertible Top Latches 3 Press the Power Top Switch to lower the top just enough to disengage the top pins from the header turn the handle counterclockwise and raise the handle to the stowed position NOTE The Power Top Switch has two detent positions for lowering the convertible top Pressing and holding the Power Top Switch lightly in the first detent position will lower the windows slightly and
118. Variance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default Zone is 8 During program ming the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected To manually calibrate the Compass start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position With a short button press less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed A long longer than two seconds EVIC button Press will place the Compass in 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se calibration mode The Cal indicator will come on con pum uum tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com pass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate A short EVIC button press from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable features and return it to its normal operating mode To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circ
119. YOUR VEHICLE Se front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD indicator lamp is not illuminated Passenger Airbag Disabled Light The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when teenagers most children in a forward facing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 child restraint or booster seats most children that can properly wear the vehicle s seat belt and when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For all other occupants the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint see section on child restraints WARNING Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an airbag A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Passenger Front Passenger Airbag Disable n Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Child ON OFF Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob ject
120. You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 te ee ee At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules CAUTION the system should be drained flushed and refilled Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount gine coolants may result in engine damage and may of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove ant is introduced into the cooling system m an all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old emerge
121. a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adju
122. a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Decupaa 1 200 Iba Weight EXAMPLE 1 sae 5 2 3 865 Ibs 185 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 idee vad doute tameo e ed Prism dee aaea aa EE Occupat 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 1820 Ibi 3 2 t crupann 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 lbs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 CDecupant 1 200 Ibs Oeeupan z 200 lbg 2 2 Q TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 ibs minus 400 lbs 465 lbs 81124d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect
123. acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the
124. accident Al High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs EN STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed
125. ach other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system 8105b204 UConnect Switches 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voi
126. adio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will r
127. ake up air filter replace as necessary Adjust the generator drive belt tension gt x lt Replace the Make up air filter gt x lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 426 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES BEEN M A Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 l Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X DE placed at 3 months n Rotate tires X X i33 Inspect the brake linings X S Change the brake fluid If vehicle is used for trailer X IE towing i Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X D necessary IM Change the manual transaxle fluid t X Flush and replace the engine coolant if not replaced X gj at 60 months hg Inspect the Make up air filter replace as necessary X ne SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES 427 Miles Kilometers 108 000 180 000 111 000 185 000 114 000 190 000 117 000 195 000 120 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re placed at 3 months X X X Rotate tires X gt x lt Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Replace the Make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension Change aut
128. amination will severely shorten bulb life 1 Remove the headlight access cover splash shield located in the front wheel well opening Bcd 465 3 Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and 2 Disconnect the electrical connector replace the bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lights Front Fog Lights If Equipped 1 Remove the headlight access cover splash shield 1 Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash located in the front wheel well opening shield to gain access to the fog light 2 Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn to replace 2 Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing and replace the bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb BDecATABE 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Tail Stop and Rear Turn Signal Lights 1 Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and remove the housing from the vehicle 2 Twist the bulb socket 1 4 turn to remove it from the housing 8Dc4f469 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace Back Up Light Bulb 1 To remove the back up lamp housing from the rear fascia carefully pry out on the outboard side of the housing 2 Remove the socket from the housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace Center High Mounted Stop Light 1 Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL cover 2 Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching the two side l
129. and fan DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If
130. and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here es STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing
131. aned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide Windshield Washer Reservoir the wiper blade assembly down along the arm Gently The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the place the wiper arm on the windshield engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir wit
132. ank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let Rear Seat Occupants sedan 3 impurities into the fuel system Rear Seat Occupants convertible 2 Luggage ni hu Le ee ees 115 lbs 52 kg Rated Vehicle Capacity sedan 865 Ib 392 kg WARNING Rated Vehicle Capacity convertible 715 Ib 324 kg mH TRAILER TOWING j n In this section you will find safety tips and information e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re tank filled view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible e Never add fuel when the engine is running To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment perman
133. arm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the syste
134. ary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the Press this button to change the display from elapsed speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE playing time to time of day The time of day will be button a second time and the sound from the speakers displayed for 5 seconds will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF RW FF Auxiliary Mode the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers No function EAN Paton Vrdliaty Model RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode zu No function No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Equipped No function Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual 4 SEEM r EET mure scan lo l INFO TIME CH T Came eros DIC MPs aed SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate SET DIR 1
135. at Sedan To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Push and hold the buttons shown in the picture to fold down eith both seatback es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 e If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still does not operate properly check e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area and see if the Automatic Locking retractor ALR inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision system is activated people riding in these areas are more likely to be WARNING seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the seatback is in the Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat fully upright and locked position when occupied If and using a seat belt properly the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be NOTE taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this e If the rear center lap shoulder belt appears to be warning could result in serious or fatal injury locked into place check to verify that the seatback is fully latched 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat Convertible To provide additiona
136. at it has an airbag system e The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be
137. atch plate and pull out body and can take the forces of a collision the the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as best necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Latch Plate E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click i A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A b
138. atches 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 15 Gallons 56 7 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 2 4 Liter Engines Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil 5 0 qts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 2 4 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 6 5 qts 6 2 Liters Miles Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Non Turbo Mopar 4105409AB or equiv Turbo Mopar 4781452BB or equiv Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment 91 Octane for High Output 2 4L Turbo and 87 Octane for 2 4L Standard Turbo and 2 4L Standard Non Turbo Engines Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Fluid Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
139. ates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 306 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only d pes to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent t
140. ath to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accomodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual severe injuries in a collision Th
141. ation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Ij Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for prolonged period Engine Timing Belt Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described in the appropriate maintenance schedule Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary The fuel filters are located inside the fuel tank See your dealer for service Air Cl
142. ause the catalytic converter to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions NOTE Whe
143. ay take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seco
144. back 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold down the rear seatback Tumbling Seat Release Strap e Attach the elastic strap located at the base of the seat Folding Rear Seat Button cushion onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to e Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of hold the seat in place the seat Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Tumbling Seat Strap To return the rear seat to it s upright latched position rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position NOTE The elastic strap should be reinstalled in the clip on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat to its normal position Tumbling Rear Seat Convertible To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be tumbled forward CAUTION It is important that the front seats be pulled forward to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact between the rear seat and the front seatback If the front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will make contact during the tumbling motion and cause damage to the rear seat material After the rear seat is tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then be repositioned to the preferred position To tumble the seat forward use the following procedure 1 The seat back release knobs a
145. bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The front airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners e Occupant Classification System OCS for the Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will not detect roll over ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The ORC also monitors the readiness of the
146. be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the liftgate children can die from suffocation or heat stroke As a security measure a Seat Back Emergency Release lever is built into the left side rear seat back latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 Top or position 2 Middle the left side rear E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 seat back can be unlatched by pulling down on the NOTE Make sure that the elastic loop is around the glow in the dark lever attached to the left rear seat back emergency release handle at all times If the handle is latching mechanism pulled downward entirely through the elastic loop the zu handle will not return to its original position and the seat back may not operate properly EMERGENCY DECK LID RELEASE LATCH CONVERTIBLE WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the deck lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in Emergency Seat Back Release the trunk young children may not be able to escape Once unlatched the seat back can be pushed forward to even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped gain access into the interior of the vehicle in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
147. book name tag recognition rate is e dry weather condition optimized for the voice of the person who stored the e Operation from driver seat name in the phonebook e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Youcan say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose e Audio quality is maximized under connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom e low to medium vehicle speed mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Far End Audio Performance e low to medium blower setting e low road noise Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least fully closed windows and five 5 seconds prior to using the system e smooth road surface 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Main Menu r Towing English Dial Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol
148. brought forward to avoid trapping it behind the seatback 3 Rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position WARNING In an accident you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Rear Seat Removal Sedan The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo space e Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold down the rear seatback Folding Rear Seat Button 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M mud 3 sum e Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of the seat Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward Release Lever Location e Using the handle on the seat the seat assembly can Tumbling Seat Release Strap now be lifted and removed from the vehicle e Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the NOTE Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat floor attachments and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved when removed from the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 To reinstall the rear seat insert the seat into the floor TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD attachments Lower the release levers of the seat to latch To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward the hood release lever located under the left
149. can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive 4 and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease to posts and clamps after tightening If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each w
150. cated on the backside of the liftgate handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion if equipped Liftgate Handle NOTE In the event of a power malfunction or the remote transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING DECK LID CONVERTIBLE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also Diving wil tne GAG Open cana Tony Polson used to lock or unlock the doors and open the deck lid ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep To open the deck lid insert the key into the lock and turn the liftgate closed when you are operating the to the right The deck lid can also be opened using the vehicle remote keyless entry or by using the power deck lid release switch located in the glove box WARNING e Driving with the deck lid open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the deck lid closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure
151. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 sec
152. ce slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors REAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window Defroster Ces The push button is located at the center of the instrument panel below the radio Press this but ton to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional electric remote control heated mirrors An amber light shows that the defroster is on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Rear Defroster Switch NOTE The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes of operation Each following activation of the defroster will last for five minutes 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Rear Wiper Washer Switch If Equipped A switch on the right side o
153. ce commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 example you can either use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please remem ber the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the option
154. ce or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months 7 whichever comes first and follow schedule B AII Engines of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Non Turbo Charged Engine then 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A NON TURBO in the maintenance sched ule section of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A TURDO in the maintenance schedule section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine O
155. check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light comes on during normal vehicle operation vehicle has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it can not
156. compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF t
157. ct with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen sion dimensions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and brak ing of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable Alignment And Balance handling and stress to steering and suspension com oM ponents You could lose control and have an accident Poor suspension alignment may result in resulting in seri
158. d and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methano
159. d display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The r
160. d down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Climate Controls es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere The controls are as follows Fan Control OFF HIGH Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position B15fbac4 Mode Control Air Direction FLOOR The mode control allows you mix 1o choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular BI LEVEL DANSE DEFROST mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode Panel gt Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level ud Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air
161. difications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 e Do not modify the front seat center console or center WARNING position seat in any way Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle could result in death or serious injury to the front e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci cover dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the airbag control modules detect a moderate to severe col lision to he
162. e wheel lock up yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to Blow dora or atap The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon
163. e Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or oo loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your e The light comes on and remains on while driving authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Event Data Recorder EDR Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause i the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal data parameters see list below in an event data recorder airbag to inflate when it is not desired g You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee i i Paleta divertida kace biok that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle th
164. e cS ci eine wee 362 363 370 Car Wash S s sa g sac dox dex bue e dub ded 395 Carbon Monoxide Warning llus 325 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier Carrier Luggage Catalytic Converter 450 INDEX BEEN Caution Exhaust Gas 000000 eee 114 CD Compact Disc Player 240 248 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 265 Cellular Phone 0 0 0 0 0 eee 136 266 Center High Mounted Stop Light 410 Chains Tite oa axis dk eo ea Cae ee ak 320 Changing A Flat Tire 346 Chart lireSizing ze e RE eee ee PS 304 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 365 Child Restraint 00000000008 72 105 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 76 109 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 75 Child Safety Locks ceca bs 23 Child Seat erre asco backs Ronan E aces a8 78 111 Clean Air Gasoline 1 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 323 Climate Control 0 0 0 0 eee eee 266 C locked ae ee ek AU des 238 242 250 aid rM 389 Clutch Fld ot 1a du d REPE OOS ES Ee 389 Coin Older 4 Exeter E eel aie 204 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 265 Compact Spare Tite isses ee Remy ne 315 COmpass cen UE OUR ae RR Sh ee ree e PE 237 Compass Calibration 0000050 237 Compass Variance si issrisrssissniss irisi 235 Console ie e eR RE edat 204 Contract Service iil wed iara 442 Convertbl 52 4 Rr RE s 121 Convertible Boot 0 00 00 eee
165. e airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The front airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners e Occupant Classification System OCS for the Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag i
166. e battery against discharge The second is in the right rear cargo area Rear Power Outlet Since this outlet is remote from the driver it is powered by the ignition switch only when it is in the ON or ACCESSORY positions to protect the battery against discharge Note Neither of the power outlets will accept a cigar lighter unit They are intended only for accessory usage 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CONSOLE FEATURES The console has two front cup holders a removable coin holder 12 volt power outlet and a front storage tray There are three additional cup holders one is molded in Many accessories that can be plugged in draw the center of the console to hold large cups and the others power from the vehicle s battery even when not are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in the in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if rear seat The floor console power outlet will also operate plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life optional Smoker s Package and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the
167. e child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seat back Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child rest
168. e frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and of the fluid Procedure For Checking Fluid Level To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for at minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Depress the brake pedal and place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P PARK 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 24 km 15 miles The fluid cannot be comfortable held between the finger tips Warm is when the fluid is between 85 to 125 F 29 to 52 C Transaxle Dipstick Location ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading If the fluid is hot reading should be in the cross hatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be betwee
169. e in the places provided 9 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 10 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW BATTERY WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow this procedure carefully 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set parking brake place auto matic transaxle in PARK manual transaxle in NEU TRAL and turn ignition to OFF
170. e m which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TOW HEIGHT i B1546c Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for Tongue Weights TW above 150 Ibs 68 kg and required for Tongue Weights above 300 Ibs 136 kg Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended en STARTING AND OPERATING 335 CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e
171. e off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the prob lem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and C Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 366 MAINTAIN
172. e releases release the latches on the inboard side of the crossbar supports on each side of the vehicle then move the crossbars to the desired position Once the crossbar is in the desired position return both latches to the locked position To adjust the crossbars with botton style releases depress the button and slide the crossbar to the next locking position Alternate sides until the crossbars are posi tioned correctly for your cargo and the stanchions are locked square to the slide rails External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity NOTE When the luggage rack is not in use place the crossbars together at the rear of the vehicle In this position they are designed to improve the vehicle aero dynamics and reduce wind noise N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 CAUTION To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to nat
173. e seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts If the belt webbing is twisted and comes in contact with the wearers body the twisted belt should be corrected using the Lap Shoulder belt untwisting procedure found in this section All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts 46 THINGS TO KNOW
174. ea Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules check all drive belts for condition and proper tension Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage which could result in belt failure If adjustment is re quired see your authorized dealer for service Special tools are required to properly measure tension and to restore belt tension to factory specifications Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to the Engine data Label located under the hood for the proper type of
175. eaner Element Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule p NOTE For vehicles with a Turbo engine a small amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 normal The amount will depend on driving style The air Maintenance Free Battery cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make up You will never have to add water nor is periodic main air filter element should be installed during the normal tenance required air filter maintenance procedure WARNING CAUTION When servicing the battery always reinstall the battery thermowrap The thermowrap provides bat tery heat protection and will extend overall battery life Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in evaporative loss of the battery fluid The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
176. ecognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre F cation quency kHz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 BSE T 2 30 795 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs m
177. eel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 7 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 8 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Stow the lug wrench and jack in their designated location Secure all parts using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tir
178. eep your hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the Universal Transceiver NOTE If you do not successfully program the Uni versal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held transmitter refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph or call toll free for customer assistance at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Rolling Code Programming NOTE If your hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the Universal Transceiver but your garage door or other device does not operate and your device was manufactured after 1996 your garage door opener or other device may have a Rolling Code system On garage door openers with the Rolling Code feature the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the copying of your code To check if your device is protected by a Rolling Code system e Check the owner s manual for the device for mention of Rolling Codes e Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer sal Transceiver If the Universal Transceiver indicator light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds the device has the Rolling Code feature To train a garage door opener or other rolling code equipped devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion of this text ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE The assistance of a second person may make the following programming procedure quicker and
179. electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light and PAD indicator light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passen ger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either t momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for occupants that we
180. eleted After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that y
181. elt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Latch Plate To Buckle A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
182. em performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Brake Fluid Master Cylinder Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transaxle All front wheel drive vehicles have a transmission and differential assembly contained within a single housing Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recom mended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in mor
183. en are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible chi
184. ent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR es STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjus
185. ents e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals e Check the automatic transaxle fluid level as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake condition master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed Check the coolant level hoses and clamps E SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES 419 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES Follow schedule B All Engines if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following condi tions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48 000 miles 80 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an t e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing t e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice t e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine
186. epaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the airbag control modules detect a moderate to severe col lision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra
187. er button on the front of the armrest and raise the armrest for access to the lower storage bin The lower storage has a power outlet if equipped a slot for a power cord and can be used for storing up to six CD s and other miscellaneous items EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Storage Pockets CAU TONI There are also Storage pockets located on each door trim e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw panel power from the vehicle s battery even when not REAR SHELF PANEL IF EQUIPPED i use Pen ie ular phones etc Eventuali ai The rear shelf panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo plugged ny ee ple ges MA area The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five 5 y different positions and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers NOTE The liftgate may be opened or closed with the vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the rear cargo shelf panel in position 1 position 2 position 3 battery even more quickly Only use these inter or position 4 mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid tipping lock the shelf securely in all positions Do
188. er the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the E display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready
189. ering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 13 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition s
190. es with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch the battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reassemble the transmitter case Snap the halves together and test transmitter operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The system monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will signal for about 18 minutes For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights park lights tail lights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes If the monitored system which triggered the alarm is deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3 minutes of alarm time is reached If the monitored system which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off immediately To set the alarm 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the door key power door lock switch or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors 3 The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the system will automatically disarm After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
191. esigned to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of sOdsbe 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance 2 4L High Output Turbo Engine Your engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91 The purchase of higher octane is not required The use of high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91 is recommended but not required High quality unleaded gasoline having a minumum octane rating of 87 may safely be used for your vehicle Use of these lower octane gasolines however may result in reduced acceleration performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issue
192. eters 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate tires X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces sary Not required if previously changed 1 XM lt gt lt gt lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Replace the Make up air filter X Adjust the generator drive belt tension X Change the automatic transaxle fluid and fil X ter O Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 X months if not done at 102 000 miles E SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES 425 necessary Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X X placed at 3 months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not required if previously changed t Replace the engine timing belt Inspect the M
193. etween the four available gears When you wish to engage autostick simply move the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position The transmis sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out of the Autostick mode Autostick General Information e The transmission will automatically upshift from first to second gear and from second to third gear when engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM e Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph 119 km h and from second to first gear above 41 mph 66 km h will be ignored 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME You can start out in first second or third gear Shifting into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed reaches 15 mph 24 km h The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions While in the Autostick mode Speed Control will only function in third or fourth gear Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed control If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable the Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION NOTE The parking brake s
194. eypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by yo
195. f the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this dis
196. f the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the ON position will activate the wiper Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position Rear Wiper Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer If Equipped is shared It is located in the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Bottle STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0000 280 W Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 284 Automatic Transaxle
197. f the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts If the belt webbing is twisted and comes in contact with the wearers body the twisted belt should be corrected using the Lap Shoulder belt untwisting procedure found in this section The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front your body These are the strongest parts of your seat next to your arm Grasp the l
198. f this manual on Replacement Tires for Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required 338 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional RIGHT space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front STOP TURN O of you Failure to do so could result in an accident LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN a M PINS Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring PARK UL W
199. feature is enabled 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center T EVIC if equipped section of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Teuton Key Poston Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition programming ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 t f 3 NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors have the child protection door lock system To use the system open each rear door and move the control UP to engage When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if
200. for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED NOTE The HomeLink system will be disabled if the Vehicle Theft Alarm if equipped is in the Prearmed Armed or Alarming state The HomeLink system will only operate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm if equipped is in the Disarmed mode The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batterie
201. front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The side airbag control module will not detect roll over front or rear collisions The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle i
202. g beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List
203. g heat from the engine cooling system 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or WARNING others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of You could be crushed Never put any part of your this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start System Pressure Cap paragraph or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed behind the right rear side trim panel in the cargo area Jack Location Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a hook basket mechanism To re move or stow the compact spare use the jack handle to rotate the s
204. gain momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 WARNING In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal
205. h no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the rear seat back is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seat back is not fully latched NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt can not be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched e If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still can not be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in the fully upright and locked position when occu pied If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should imme diately be taken to
206. h push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
207. h the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE On vehicles so equipped the radio steering wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD DVD changer will 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 414 SEEK rr MUTE SCAN PSCAN TIME aa RW FF ee 1 0 TE 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Elect
208. h windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze 3 Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip until it locks in place Washer Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position
209. hat you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is d
210. he 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location D SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF COC NEVER EXCE D XXX kG OE NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar T125 700415 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 200kPa 29PS 200kPa 28PS 420kPa amp PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4M100268 Tire and Loading Information 211 bSaga This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear Tire Placard Location and spare tires 811ad0d6 308 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front
211. he PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant catego
212. he ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode an
213. he radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which Ij minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the t
214. he windshield open the latch handle and turn the handle clockwise to open the latches Press the switch again to continue raising the top until the two pins seat themselves in the windshield header NOTE If the top is not latched right away it may be necessary to press the power top switch UP or DOWN quickly to align the pins to the windshield header Engaging Convertible Top Latches 5 Raise the latch handle into the stowed position 4 Pull down on the latch handle and rotate it counter clockwise to engage the latches 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Car top carriers ski racks etc should not be at tached to the convertible top mechanism as they will damage the top Do not place objects on the convert ible top in the top well or on the sport bar Damage to the convertible top may occur Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation If Equipped 1 With the top down and the convertible top latch handle in the stowed position lay the unfolded boot cover across the convertible top Convertible Top Latch Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 2 Install the rear edge of the boot first tucking the rear edge of the boot under the rear and both sides of the rails xu Boot Laying Across Convertible Top 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Pull the right and left boot arms forward and engage both boot arm snaps Make sure both
215. heft Alarm Security Alarm 226 Traction Control sss erpaci EE aer ER 301 Tum signal sesse tee04ave 40 181 183 224 409 VoltaB 2 nahin nh ne eke bared eR Ee 226 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 222 Loading Vehicle i mide eges 329 NYS ean detegit doped oes 2S 307 Locks Child Protection 42 40 46 aaa rnae RE het 23 DOOR sins nata th data tee Sarna Gada eD a 18 lowetr DOOF sasa ede eb yee tee dA ae eo AE 20 Steering Wheel sins 34 eur gatge Ep RENS 18 Lubrication Body odiis swe ranee ea NEE 379 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 212 Lumbar Support 06 sos nn 162 Maintenance Free Battery 04 375 Maintenance General llle 367 Maintenance Procedures lilius 367 en INDEX 457 Maintenance Schedule Schedule A Non Turbo 005 429 Schedule A Turbo isle 433 Sched l B iie wh eg ue BOR PE RYS 419 Schedule B All Engines isses 419 Maintenance Schedules 000000085 416 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 224 365 Manual Override Convertible Top 132 357 Manual Service ico eas daa RE seb dade nes 444 Manual Transaxle 000 280 290 394 Downshif ng 24k RERO ESS 293 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 0 000008 394 Frequency of Fluid Change 394 Lubricant Selection llle 394 Map Reading Lights 0 178 179 Master Cylinder Brakes
216. henever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for MALE PIN motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin 813282be wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness 4 Pin Connector and connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND C BRAKES 8125346 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 339 If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Check the automatic trans
217. his process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e f your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TIY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a
218. horities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examinatio
219. hould be engaged and the gear selector placed in REVERSE before leaving the vehicle especially on an incline Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal B rzbc b Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear not THIRD when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in THIRD STARTING AND OPERATING 291 For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop m NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle 292 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 4 Liter Turbo If Equipped B rzbcs4d The neutral position of the shift lever is located between THIRD and FOURTH gear This is the position the shifter lever will return to automatically when neutral is se lected When shifting into FIFTH gear be sure to press the shifter lever all the way to the right to avoid acciden tally selecting THIRD gea
220. ible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particu lar attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cyl
221. igh less than a very small adult NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push ing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indica tor lamp illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag Disable PAD indicator lamp is not illuminated Passenger Airbag Disabled Light The PAD indictor light should not be illumi
222. il Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location see the Engine Compartment illustration in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that are American Petroleum Institute API Certified and have the recom mended SAE viscosity grade Follow the maintenance schedule that describes your driving type Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your ar
223. ill be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button
224. in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 with a variable pause between cycles desirable For SEHE maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch into the upper end of the delay range and allow the wipers to return to the park position The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is it enters the LO continual speed position WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Windshield Wiper Operation could lead to an accident You might not see other Rotate the control to the second detent for Low speed vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed the windshield during freezing weather warm the operation windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle
225. inder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning lamp is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be Ij a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System See your local authorized dealer for service 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard pro longed braking You could have an accident CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch syst
226. ing Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight MAX OIL MARK B7 5an4 Engine Oil Dipstick Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 CAUTION Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level above the Max mark on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to decide if any apply to you e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi Poli
227. ing excessive shifting and heat build up Use the 3 range when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress 1 Low This range should be used for maximum engine braking when descending steep grades In this range up shifts will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down shifts from 2nd to first will occur as early as possible EN STARTING AND OPERATING 289 AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi tion and is identified by the word AUTOSTICK When you place the shift lever in the Autostick position it can be moved from side to side Moving the lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear display located in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting b
228. int top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle
229. ion e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing
230. ioners front airbags work with the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child category This could be a child a teenager or even a small adult Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or de
231. ittent 0 00 00 185
232. k turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Convertible Top Operation To Lower The Top lille To Raise The Top 00 0006 Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation If Equipped uoces teet Ct oe ee ees Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal And Storage Convertible Top Manual Override B Mirrors diania dad IR Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirror Driver s Side 134 Outside Mirror Passenger s Side 134 Electric Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped 4sesee ra pe ERE RES 135 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 135 Sun Visor Sliding Feature 136 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped sse a er eene 136 Operations s vedo wea eR Y YS 138 Phone Call Features 0 05 145 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME
233. l 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can c
234. l on the restraint for weight and height limits e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the actly when installing an infant or child restraint restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re The passenger seat belts are equipped with either straint in the front seat may be struck by a cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be deploying passenger airbag which may cause se switched to an automatic locking mode which are vere or fatal injury to the infant designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a switchable retractor it will have a distinctive label To operate the switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this sect
235. l storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward The seat back release knobs are located in the trunk area Pull the left side seatback release knob to fold down the left side seatback Pull the right side seatback release knob to fold down the right side seatback Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING Tumbling Rear Seat Sedan To provide additional storage in the cargo area each rear e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area seat can be tumbled forward inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision CAUTION people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed It is important that the front seats be pulled forward to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact between the rear seat and the front seatback If the Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will make contact during the tumbling motion and cause damage to the rear seat material After the rear seat is tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then be repositioned to the preferred position Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly NOTE Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright position be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to avoid trapping it behind the seat
236. l too small A rearward facing child restraint should only be to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the straint in the front seat may be struck by a child s back is against the seat back they should use a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat vere or fatal injury to the infant 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through
237. la tion instructions E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 S0edat Latch Anchorages Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind th
238. ld be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 9 kg 20 Ibs but are less than one year old ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Child
239. ld seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 9 kg 20 Ibs but are less than one year old ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe held in the vehicle by the lap portion refer to pm injury or death to infants in this position NOTE Pos additonal Guiems sn Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who www nhtsa dot gov or www seatcheck org are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who e Improper installation can lead to failure of an are older than one year These child seats are also held infant or child restraint It could come loose in a in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH collision The child could be badly injured or child restraint anchorage system killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh actly quen installing am antan bor cmd XESERRIDK ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are stil
240. ld soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion Wash them with the same soap solu tion as the body of your vehicle Rinse wheels thor oughly When cleaning extremely dirty wheels care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi cals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels Only Mopar Wheel Cleaners are recommended DO NOT USE any of the items listed below which can damage your wheels and wheel trim DO NOT USE e Any abrasive cleaner e Any abrasive cleaning pad such as steel wool or abrasive brush e Any cleaner that contains an acid which can react with and discolor the chrome surface e Chrome polish 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN e Oven cleaner e A car wash that uses carbide tipped wheel cleaning brushes or acidic solutions CAUTION Many wheel cleaners contain acids that may harm the wheel surface NOTE Replacement costs for components damaged as a result of not following the recommended cleaning practices are considered the responsibility of the cus tomer Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed prom
241. le operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual FUEL REAR WIHDCN WINDSHIELD INTERMITTENT WIPER athe rm i aie D FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD YYA EHER WAEHER FLUID LEVEL i C vein LG r EL OF ENGINE OIL REAR INDENT MEEReAY BATTERY MINDAHII CHARGING HEATER MR pro d At ENGINE COOLANT ILE SEAT TETHER ANCHO
242. les under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indica tor turns off The compass will now function normally SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK Setting The Analog Clock To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little wit
243. lp restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deplo
244. ltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will c
245. lter replace as nec X i essary D U L E S 8 422 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES ME Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000 Kilometers 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 60 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Xxx Inspect the PCV valve and replace as neces sary Replace the Make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension gt x lt gt x lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES 423 H Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 v Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80000 85 000 90 000 i Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X N replaced at 3 months A Rotate tires X X X i Inspect the brake linings X E Change the brake fluid If vehicle is used for X S trailer towing C Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace as X H necessary k Change the manual transaxle fluid t X U Inspect the Make up air filter Replace as nec X E essary 8 424 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES EBENEN Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilom
246. m is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid types Front Suspension Ball Joints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when ever under vehicle service is done Damaged seals and their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must be replaced ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors iftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cle
247. m overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Inside Bulb No Center Console Floor Lamp T37 Climate Controls llle 6233137 Console Gear Selector 0008 PC194 Dome Light sedan 0 T579 Dome Light Sport Bar Lights convertible T904 Instrument Cluster Illumination 74 Overhead Reading Light Overhead Console T1037 Overhead Reading Light Rearview Mirror T192 Rear Cargo aw ka ke x RR ES E Rd T906 Visor Vanity ssi eb ARR eA 6501966 All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam Headlight 9006XS High Beam Headlight 9005XS Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Light 4157NAKX Front Fog Light 0000 9145 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL o r m Sister Beaters cio oie Oat need 921 W16W Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Convertible s Sos diode tha ees ENS LED Rear Iall St0ps2 us tete ue RT Eee 3157 Rear Turn Signal vs eser ene 3757A Backup Light License Light 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight Bulb Replacement CAUTION Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your fingers Oil cont
248. manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with t
249. mission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving While stopped put transaxle in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing on vehicle s equipped with auto matic transaxle s is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle it may be towed with all four wheels on the ground in a forward direction at any legal highway speed for any distance if the transaxle is in neutral WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher
250. more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the NORMAL STARTING procedure 282 STARTING AND OPERATING MEn WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down NOTE Letting the engine idle after severe operation allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating temperature The following chart should be used as a guide in deter minning the amount of engine idle time required to sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut down depending upon the type of driving and the amount of cargo EN STARTING AND OPERATING 283 TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN CHART Driving Conditions Idle Time in minutes Before Shut Down Normal Driving Not required Aggressive Driving or Heavily Loaded 3 Trailer Tow 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down CAUTION while shifting out of Park WARNIN
251. mp Red Heated Mirror 17 10 Amp Red IOD Feed CVT Mod Mod Wcm EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Fuse Fuse 26 15 Amp Lt ENG ASD Relay 33 10 Amp Red ABS MOD 1962 Blue Feed 2 Conn PCM 27 10 Amp Red IGN RUN Only 34 30 Amp ABS Valve Feed ORC Feed Pink 28 10 Amp Red IGN RUN ORC 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed OCM Feed Green 29 EMPTY 36 30 Amp Headlamp 30 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats Pink Washer Control 31 10 Amp Red Headlamp 37 25 Amp Natu Spare Washer Relay ral Control 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Con Pink trol Feed 1 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE FAUTON If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 e When installing the Integrated Power Module days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop You may erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical syste
252. n Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 4L N A and 2 4L 20 Sq Ft 1000 Ibs 454 kg 110 Ibs 50 kg Turbo Automatic 2 4L N A and 2 4L 20 Sq Ft 1000 Ibs 454 kg 110 Ibs 50 kg Turbo Manual N A Naturally Aspirated Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to sid
253. n Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions are displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be displayed during this 3 second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from where it was before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average o
254. n They are round bars part of the seat and body structure and are readily visible In addition there e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child are two tether strap anchorages located behind the rear restraint manufacturer s directions seat head form in the convertible top storage area e If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe Latch Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over
255. n mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local aut
256. n of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive
257. n or off On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Set tings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equip
258. n removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door windows fully open reinforcement Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 inches 50 mm inside the opening If using a portable container it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the restricting door Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the passen ger s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Gas Cap Tether Hook es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top system could result from using an improper fuel off the fuel tank after filling tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full CAUTION WARNING A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near Indicator Light to turn on the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in
259. n restart the engine Shift into D and resume driving NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset dealer service is required Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic Transaxle DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the selector in P Park position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 e When shifting into P Park depress the button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure forward until it stops those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from e When engaged in P Park you will not be able to the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift key is removed from the ignition the transmission lever button 5 shift lever is locked in the P Park
260. n the lower two holes into the area marked LOW If the fluid level shows low add sufficient transmission fluid to bring to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is seated properly Fluid And Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed as follows Maintenance schedule A Non Turbo Charged En gines No change necessary Maintenance schedule A Turbo Charged Engines No change necessary Maintenance schedule B All Engines Every 60 000 miles 100 000 km change fluid and filter under the following conditions e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte nance schedules 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives The manufacturer recommends against the addition of any fluid additives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection
261. nal has been learned 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and then rapidly when the programming is successful NOTE When programming such a garage door opener or gate unplug the device to prevent possible damage to the garage door or gate motor Operation Press and hold the desired button on the Universal Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins to operate The light in the display shows that the signal is being transmitted The hand held transmitter may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single Button 1 Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be reprogrammed Do not release until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter one to three inches away from the button to be trained 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to flash first slowly then rapidly When the indicator lights begin to flash rapidly release both buttons Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies To erase all of the previously trained frequencies hold down both outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may
262. nated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 front passenger seat In this case the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For all other occupants the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint see section on child re straints WARNING Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an airbag A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Passenger Front Passenger Airbag Disable n Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Child ON OFF Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects GRE OFF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee or instrument panel
263. ncy it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze solution coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water whe
264. nds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE con
265. nflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will not detect roll over ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light and PAD indicator light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passen ger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either t momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on af
266. nflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated EN STARTING AND OPERATING 313 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire
267. nstruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A
268. nt and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon such as steel wool or scouring powder which will sibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly Special Care with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially Aluminum and Chrome plated should be cleaned regularly when cool using mi
269. nt safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside o
270. ntenance iss 416 Service Assistance cee eee eee 440 Service Contract suck dusk uo eb hiaai 442 Service Manuals ce eee 444 Setting the Clock 0040 238 242 250 Settings Personal 0 0 0 e ee eee 232 Severe Service celles 419 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 292 Shoulder Belts 4 8 4 slaw aes ERES 45 81 Side Aumbag iiec eierniie Kai eiei nei 65 99 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 272 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 353 SNOW TITES serier iard oe EARS Re E OX ew 320 Spare De yes 4ducten treme oi Emer 315 316 347 Spark Plugs ck Maw se Veins ata Rs 372 Speed Control Cruise Control 189 223 Speedometer p risana dre be a ali eee ed 222 Speedometer and Odometer 219 ALONE C m 280 Automatic Transmission 280 Engine Fails to Start 0000 281 Manual Transmission 280 Starting Procedures 0 0 0 cosas 280 Steering POWE aes hog fdewaka es deed Ves e 299 378 Tilt Column 2222 e x EIER aed bad 187 Wheel Lock 0 0 0 00 0 cee eens 18 StOldge sse oe a EE CREER ER ACRES 205 406 St ck Freeing i2 swig sed uer E ae te eae 354 SUN ROOP uere d a ea deine Base ase age 199 Sun Visor Extension llle 136 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 55 89 Synthetic Engine Oil i3 eee ey iesms 371 Tachometer 462 INDEX aa Tem
271. o the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h Tire Rotation Recommendations Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual STARTING AND OPERATING 321 wear should be corrected before rotating The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE 4 TIRE ROTATION Bba He 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L Standard Engine and 2 4L Standard Turbo Engine Your vehicle is d
272. oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B AII Engines of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES ME km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B AIl Engines of the Maintenance Sched ules section of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Non Turbo Charged Engine then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A NON TURBO in the maintenance sched ule section of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this manual en SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES 421 H Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 Kilometers 5000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25000 30 000 i Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X N replaced at 3 months A Rotate tires X X X i Inspect the brake linings X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace as X S necessary C Inspect the Make up air fi
273. old the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock and Flash Lamps With Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles re fer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
274. omatic transaxle fluid and filter gt Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not replaced at 102 000 miles Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables AM X lt lt gt lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 SCHEDULE B ALL ENGINES ME This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty This maintenance is not required if previously replaced t This maintenance is required only for police taxi limousine type operation or trailer towing This maintenance is required only for police taxi limousine type operation or trailer towing Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts ee SCHEDULE A NON TURBO 429 SCHEDULE A NON TURBO Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Replace the Make up air filter Adj
275. on Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push button is out It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE Ifa malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrat ing therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and preci sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles Reset Mode The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle shifts automatically into second gear The transaxle remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se N will continue to operate This second gear limp in feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event that the problem has been momentary the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears Stop the vehicle and shift into Park P Turn the Key to OFF the
276. on when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlamps Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlamps On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
277. ond time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Toggle the PTY button to types select the following format Program Type 16 Digit Character Dis play No program type or un E ero None Adult Hits Adult Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic Rock College College Country Country Emergency Test Emergency Test Foreign Language Foreign Language Information Information Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will
278. ont seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten sioners both must be replaced 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System Be
279. ontinue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se PASSENGER AIRBAG DRIVER AIRBAG INFLATABLE KNEE BLOCKER Front Airbag Components NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment KNEE BOLSTER Si amp d ed The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
280. oors If Equipped 23 ll Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 25 Using The Panic Alarm 33 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 33 VH Equipped TTC FONIGEGIHORS cscs ssai A To Program Additional Transmitters 34 Pang Me AE ALA ae giegispannepe a General Information 06 35 a a aa Mire a Transmitter Battery Service 35 Programming Additional Transmitters 27 Bl Security Alarm System If Equipped 36 General Information llle 29 To Set The Alarm L L L LL LLL LLL 36 Battery Replacement llle 30 To Disarm The System eeee000 37 Bil Remote Keyless Entry Convertible 31 Saciiby System Mab Overtidie eu eat 37 To Uniek TRA OMS d e long ix d niea 9 E Liftgate Sedan e nnns 38 PEO THO DOSE eel aca ene esa ae 95 MDS Vid Convertible csse eer 39 POD TO STA gp fasi pictis a Power Deck Lid Release 40 Panic Alatm iie 34 ee RR Rm 33 ll Emergency Seat Back Release Sedan 40 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ll Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch Convertible Bl Power Windows
281. op will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleanings easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment Washing Hand washing is highly recommended Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material If you must use an automatic car wash soft cloth systems are preferred es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 CAUTION Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top The top should be washed with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and Mopar Car Wash or a mild soap solution Do not use detergent CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before lowering Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum
282. ou have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold p
283. our vehicle is experiencing electrical failure low battery etc and it is necessary to raise the convertible top perform the following steps 1 Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw which is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage area 2 Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the convertible top to be raised manually Bleeder Screw 3 Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins seat themselves in the windshield header 4 Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches 5 Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to engage the latches 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Sene NOTE Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can cause convertible top operating concerns Engaging Convertible Top 6 Raise the handle into the stowed position 7 Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by turning the screw clockwise until it stops Tighten the screw securely MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E 2 4L Turbo Engine Compartment 362 E 2 4L Engine Compartment 363 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 364 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 364 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs i acy avian Sac Gan eacus ip ep deas 365 Bl Replacement Parts 000 366 H Dealer Service 1 ees 367 Bl Maintenance Procedures
284. ous injury or death Use only the tire s Hast Xe wear m and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your i vehicle e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity wear other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could e Vehicle pull to right or left result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type t
285. p storage area 2 Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the convertible top to be raised manually Bleeder Screw N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 3 Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins 6 Raise the handle into the stowed position SERCIAEIHISCN ES 1 EDGE GOHIOIS henden 7 Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by 4 Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches turning the screw clockwise until it stops Tighten the ly 5 Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to acini engage the latches NOTE Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can omm t cause convertible top operating concerns MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Engaging Convertible Top Latches 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the Outside Mirror Driver s Side small control under the mirror to the night position Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the while set in the day position toward windshield inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the con
286. pare tire drive nut The nut is located under the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area just inside the liftgate opening Lowering Spare Tire 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Spare Tire Removal Lift up the cover and fit the jack handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the swivel hook from the stowage basket Swing the basket down to remove the compact spare tire CAUTION The hook is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle Turn OFF the ignition vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 Jacking Instructions 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the stowage bag NOTE
287. ped with Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of
288. perature Gauge Engine Coolant 222 345 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 76 109 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 36 Theft System Security Alarm 36 Tilt Steering Column 0004 187 Tire and Loading Information Placard 307 Tire Identification Number TIN 306 Tire Markings llle 302 Tire Safety Information 00 302 Oe eee 115 311 445 Aging Life of Tires 000 0 318 Air Pressure does ng oh whos Bi ee we dans 311 Alignment 5 esis ed Chae Ee Cee eas 319 CHAINS acier tare ORENEAN Ehe ay 320 Changing lt 4 ee pi kd REL CAE RE ES 346 Compact Spates ius kk Rhe RR RR e 315 Flat Changing 332 3e ondes n irs 351 General Information 0005 311 High Speed 3 2444 04x BERE pmi RS 313 Inflation Pressures llle 312 Jacking eee RE RR PRESA ee bes 346 Life Of lires i a e E RR RR xs 318 Load Capacity esses 307 308 Quality Grading 00 0000 445 Radi l sarad spacie Rx Exe bares 314 Replacement s ese aniis pune ee ese 318 R otati n ludus de BY UE EUR eae 321 Safety caesa e rera p been ra es 302 311 OIZeS chat a ded baad ep Pd bau ed bans 304 Snow Tires i cxcacccocGeerddbao ssa ge ck awe dra 320 Spare Lire ducem dece XR wh oe dative 347 SPINNING serere tarere cogn Ed eR Y cars 316 Tread Wear Indicators liess 317 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight
289. perature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures COOL WARM B15 5a8d NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Air Conditioning Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged B15fbac8 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Circulation Control Use this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in recir culate mode Only use the re circulate mode to temporarily block out any outside odors RECIRCULATE smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of
290. play selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais depend ing on availability As you continue the displayed infor mation will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position automatic transmissions Press and hold the EVIC but ton when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Press and hold the EVIC butt
291. ploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child category This could be a child a teenager or even a small adult Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning
292. portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 The warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 19 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON See page 183 for more information 20 Airbag Light The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8 e seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not come on during starting stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer See page 103 for more information 21 Oil Pressure Light i Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on
293. position securing CAUTION e Look at the shift indicator window on the console to ensure it is in the P Park position the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the The following indicators should be used to ensure that steering wheel and shift lever are released Other you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P wise damage to the steering column or shifter could Park position result 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Engine may be started in this range D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts and best fuel economy When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing trailers use the 3 range 3 Drive This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transaxle will operate normally in first and second while in this range NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance fuel economy and extend transaxle life by reduc
294. ptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with t
295. r Also use care when selecting FIRST gear to avoid accidentally selecting REVERSE When moving the shifter lever into REVERSE press the lever to the left until the resistance is overcome When the ignition switch is in the ON position a chime will sound to confirm that reverse has been selected and the backup lights will illuminate NOTE Listen for the audible chime to confirm RE VERSE gear is properly selected Never shift into RE VERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in table 1 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 TABLE 1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE NORMAL TABLE 2 MANUAL TRANSAXLE MAXIMUM ACCELERATION AND CRUISE SHIFT SPEEDS PERFORMANCE SHIFT SPEEDS IN mph km h IN mph km h EN ENGINE 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4to5 GINE MODE 1 to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 SIZE SIZE 30 60 85 115 24L Accel 15 24 25 40 40 65 45 72 2AL 48 97 136 185 Turbo Cruise 15 24 2 4L Accel 15 24 Non z Turbo Cruise 16 26 25 40 42 68 45 72 25 40 33 53 44 70 20 82 28 45 38 61 in and out This is caused by an electronic limiter in the engine computer The engine will run normally when you reduce engine speed If you exceed these speeds you may notice the engine cut ra For improved performance yo
296. r METRIC appears to make your selection Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the com pass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Instrument Panel This is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 To set the variance with the ignition in the ON position with a short button press less than one seconds press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one seconds the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two seconds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long longer than two seconds EVIC button presses for each increment until the desired variance is achieved To exit the
297. r Adjust Handle Folding Seat Control Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Driver s Seat Back Tilt lIf Equipped How to operate the driver s seat 1 Push the lever down until seat back releases 2 Push the seat back forward 3 To return seat to a sitting position push seat back rearward NOTE The driver s front seat has a full recliner memory which will allow the seat back to return to its original position Driver s Seat Back Tilt Lever Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System Convertible How to operate the passenger front seat 1 Push the lever down until seat back releases 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Push seat back forward until it slides toward the dashboard Passenger Seat Back Tilt Lever 3 To return seat to a sitting position rotate seat back upright until it locks 4 Push seat rearward until the track locks NOTE The passenger front seat has a full recliner memory which will allow the seat back to returned to its original position NOTE The passenger front seat has a track memory which returns the seat to just past the half way point of the track regardless of original position Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the
298. r FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be dis played Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to eac
299. r to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM o
300. raint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS CONVERTIBLE Some of the most importa
301. ranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls
302. re Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in EN STARTING AND OPERATING 305 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indic
303. re located in the trunk area Pull the left side seatback release knob to fold down 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the left side seatback Pull the right side seatback release 2 From inside the vehicle fold the rear seat back down knob to fold down the right sid flat ER Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 3 Pull the release handle located at the bottom of the 4 Attach the cinching tether strap located at the side of folded seat back and tumble the seat forward the seat cushion onto the hook bar on the center trim 5 panel and tighten by pulling the cinching strap until the seat is secure Tumbling Rear Seat Cinching Tether Strap 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To return the tumbling rear seat to the latched normal NOTE The strap should be reinstalled in the side position use the following procedure pocket on the seat cushion before returning the seat to the latched normal position 1 Loosen the strap by pushing rearward on the cinching tether strap buckle NOTE Prior to rotating the seat cushions rearward be sure that the rear seat belt buckles are secured with the Releasing Cinching Tether Strap 2 Disconnect the cinching tether strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 NOTE Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright position be sure that the seat belt is
304. re more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you wit
305. regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protec tive covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags de
306. ren who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child and booster seat 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are restraint held an de vetuelepy e ap poor e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it NOTE For additional information refer to has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety www nhtsa dot gov or www seatcheck org Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle WARNING where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the labe
307. replaced motor vehicle Da aiy that service wore For whieh you have the knowledge and the right equipment If Inspection and service should also be performed anytime you have any doubt about your ability to perform a a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re service job take your vehicle to a competent me ceipts chanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle uu caactb ex ea n eae ned 4 Ree 440 Prepare For The Appointment 440 Prepare AList eee 440 Be Reasonable With Requests 440 B f You Need Assistance lille 440 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 443 ll Mopar Parts E Reporting Safety Defects 000 443 In Canada 20 25 sooiewRi Reve RE danse 443 Bl Publication Order Forms 0 0 444 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades Treadwear auus er lh we ERU ee dees Traction Grades Temperature Grades 440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service
308. ress the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The
309. rized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s
310. ronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tune
311. ry to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The side airbag control module will not detect roll over front or rear collisions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision
312. s Empty or Very Small Objects GRE OFF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an autho
313. s are needed Bid2cd4d HomeLink Buttons Sedan es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 a or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety HomeLink Buttons Convertible information or assistance For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Biagede1 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming The Universal Transceiver For best results install a new battery in the hand held transmitter before programming If your garage door opener located in the garage is equipped with an antenna make sure that the antenna is hanging straight down 1 Turn off the engine WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver
314. s at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone You will be asked to say a four
315. s triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker it signals the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat able Knee Blocker The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position you for the best inter action with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any mo
316. section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors and liftgate if equipped with power options Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal
317. service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the War
318. sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not
319. sition and remove the key Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE will not function SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light will come on for three 3 seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb
320. situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle CAUTION with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the air Driving with a hot cooling system could damage conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until diately and call for service the pointer drops back into the normal range After NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down appropriate action has been taken if the pointer an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner remains on the H turn the engine off immediately is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to and call for service the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removin
321. soline edi d Rue c RR P 322 Gauge udo e PE RR n dE RR ac Rot ates 222 hh ET 387 light ete erederaede dle Sacnde sy ded epus 227 Octane Rating llle 322 Requirements esi eienen sa e ak 322 System Hoses cue bie s ya wa renu aa ER 387 Tank Capacity emere eher ue d RR 411 Fuel System Caution 0 00 00 0000 329 Fueling i222 RR RR cee densa ee as 326 FUSES odie ab ae oR e eese FHSS obese die aes 403 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 192 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 326 328 364 Gasoline Clean Air llle 323 Gasoline Fuel seres 322 411 Gasoline Reformulated 323 454 INDEX EE Gauges Coolant Temperature 000 222 lul cL CM 222 Odometer vue eR EXEXX PETS 223 Tachometer lees 223 Gearshift sss uda kr ae Pagueta ny 286 General Information 0000 eee 17 General Maintenance 0 000000 eee 367 Glass Cleaning ica ater ee e ees aeos 399 Gross Axle Weight Rating 330 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 330 Hands Free Phone UConnect 136 Hazard Warning Flasher 344 Head Restraints 0 0 00 cece eee eee 164 Headlights Bulb Replacement 0004 408 Cleaning iacu ne denda CR ADIT d a A eg 399 High Beam 2 2 2 re ae RI 183 228 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 183 PASSING 24443 e aac Fer o epe 183 DWG memet
322. specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels abo
323. sting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed over the center of the head form and attached to the tether anchor located behind the rear seat head form in the convertible top storage area Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat NOTE To gain access to the achorages locate the child tether anchorage decals on the carpet behind the rear seat head forms and use a small screwdriver to pry the carpet flap open The carpet flap is attached in two different places 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Tether Strap Mounting Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restra
324. t the detent release and the window will go down auto matically Press the switch a second time in either direc tion to stop the window E Power Window Switch To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Rear Window Switches There are also rear passenger window switches sedan only located at the rear of the center console Rear Power Window Switches Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SEDAN Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 adult siz
325. t Belt Reminder 0 000005 54 88 Seat Belts Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 0 51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 51 And Pregnant Women sss 55 89 Child Restraint sses trernenet danane ei 72 105 Front Seat 4 5224 R4 ax 4kGdeng RESI pue 45 81 Pretensioners ss cerr 0 0000 cece eee 53 87 Rear Seat i 42 229 eda niege bit ee s 45 81 Reminder 0 0 0 0 cece eee nee 226 Untwisting Procedure 0 52 86 Seat Belts Convertible 000 80 Seat Belts Sedan 00 200s eee 44 CALS s ce Ni weds wee Wed d S Soe eae ES 159 Adj stment ub eave R Ea eae qaa ea ee 159 Easy Entty 2 0 0 6 cece eee 163 Emergency Seat Back Release Sedan 40 Folding Front Passenger 0 162 Head Restraints 000000008 164 Heated 4244 RS ra RES MGs 165 Lumbar Support 0 00002 162 POWER ccu xia epis dd a d e ar ede 160 Rear Folding 166 168 169 171 Rear Folding Convertible 168 Rear Folding Sedan 0 166 Removal 42 tanri rines rE Seed 175 Seatback Release llle 163 THINS 55i ehe deat ex vetet ee depu toes 163 Tumbling Rear Convertible 171 Tumbling Rear Sedan s 169 en INDEX 461 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 36 Sentry Key Immobilizer 1537 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Service and Mai
326. table friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized mm trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle plus a removable hitch head and spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer frame 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classificatio
327. te the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever below the multi function control lever and move the steering wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back up to lock the Tilt Steering Column Control column firmly in place 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH IF EQUIPPED The traction control indicator located in the instrument cluster will flash when the Traction Control System TCS is in use The TCS switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio To turn the system OFF press the TCS switch until the traction control indicator in the instrument cluster lights up Traction Control Switch To turn the system back ON press the switch a second time until the traction control indicator turns OFF NOTE The traction control indicator will illuminate momentarily as a bulb check each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the TCS switch to turn the system OFF N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 NOTE The Traction Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds
328. ted between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Indicators for the proper inspection procedure Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires CAUTION with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section o
329. tem and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 4 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 5 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 6 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 7 OdometerlTrip Odometer A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door deck hatch gate ajar and loose gas cap Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer Trip Odometer on all models NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster all warnings including door dECK hATCh and gATE will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center If Equipped in Section 3 U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller cer
330. ter below the fuel and engine tem perature gauge The EVIC consists of the following UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 System Status Vehicle information warning message displays Personal Settings customer programmable features e Compass heading Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays If Equipped e Audio mode display When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmissions or vehicle is in motion manual transmissions Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door S Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Trunk Ajar with a single chime e Low Washer Fluid with a single chime e Headlamps On e Key In Ignition EE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 EVIC Functions EVIC Butto
331. ter you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small adult NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push ing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indica tor lamp illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
332. the mirror cover turns off the lights Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended coverage of the side glass HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to e
333. there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters driver inflatable knee blocker It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure
334. tify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 8 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON See page 189 for more informa tion NOTE The word SET will not illuminate when the Speed Control System is on 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system C called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condi tion checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs
335. to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone k
336. to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button
337. to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler
338. to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical instal
339. trol to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Siritus Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID
340. trolled conditions 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 448 INDEX MM ABS Anti Lock Brake System 297 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 384 Addine E
341. ts If Equipped 183 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 189 Turn Signals 4 ais hats eue ERR SaaS A 183 To Activate Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 183 To Set At A Desired Speed 190 Passing Light 3s eoe EERO 183 To Deactivate scere ises TR 08 190 E Windshield Wipers And Washers 184 To Resume Speed 1a ies du Ehe eek E SES 190 Windshield Washers 0006 184 To Vary The Speed Setting 190 Mist Feature ve 446 eS e RE 184 Manual Transaxle zi eR 191 Windshield Wiper Operation 185 To Accelerate For Passing 191 Intermittent Wiper System 185 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 192 Rear Window Wiper Washer Programming The Universal Transceiver 194 Sedan Models Only 00 186 Rollihg Code TOCNE Artnr reri 196 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Canadian Programming Gate Programming 197 Storage 0 eee eee 205 Op rations s 3a eade ed ase aga alae ets 198 Center Console Armrest Storage Bin 205 Reprogramming A Single Button 198 Storage Pockets 0000000 207 DOCULILY sr Rae ale Wy ae ad ad 198 W Rear Shelf Panel If Equipped 207 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 199 Position 1 Top
342. uel 24 Ree de wR Gib gg hd 326 Adding Washer Fluid 00 187 275 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 0 cece eee 324 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 374 Air Conditioner Maintenance 377 Air Conditioning Controls 266 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 27 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 377 378 Air Conditioning System 266 377 Air Pressure Tires 2 asemiaan cee a a 312 AdrtDag ies ae es se ee hw te 55 89 Airbag Deployment isses 68 101 Airbag Light oc isse es 70 103 115 227 Airbag Maintenance 0005 69 103 Airbag Side senkt ee ES eee eS 65 99 Alarm Pani es 22 3 e Ea ea aden red 33 Alarm System Security Alarm 36 226 Alignment and Balance 04 319 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio iss 265 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 383 411 412 Capaciti s se eae ea tebri sr ees 411 Disposal isse rtis eere eh eg 385 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 297 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 227 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 36 Appearance Care sosdiessg seniii at nid badii 395 Auto Down Power Windows 43 Automatic Door Locks 00005 20 21 Automatic Transaxle 13 280 284 391 Fluid and Filter Changes 393 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0
343. upted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the mm following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turne
344. ur cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the followin
345. ur manual transaxle may be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in table 2 within legal speed limits Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the BRAKE ignition on the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on the lever Also place the gear selector in the Park position automatic transaxle or Reverse manual transaxle To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor ee STARTING
346. ural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel Features llli 218 Wi Instrument Cluster Base 05 219 Mi Instrument Cluster Premium 220 Mi Instrument Cluster Turbo 221 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 222 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped 22249 e ee Rene 229 EVIC FunchOns 3565 Rc EE ERREUR 231 Compass Temperature Audio 231 Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time 2 2xd 2999dbseR Re RES Personal Settings Customer Programmable beatures sersa dnexse teer RUE aoe a 232 H Setting The Analog Clock 238 lll Radio General Information 239 Radio Broadcast Signals 239 Two Types Of Signals 0 239 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Electrical Disturbances
347. ust the generator drive belt tension gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 SCHEDULE A NON TURBO ME not done at 102 000 miles Replace the Make up air filter Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if X Adjust the generator drive belt tension en SCHEDULE A NON TURBO 431 Miles 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 120000 130000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 72 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not required if previously changed 1
348. ut erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Fach time the button is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast
349. ve 35 mph 55 km h See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators E 4 Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from conta
350. vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Tire Pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle acted by 1 ti handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of areas are affected by improper tire pressure vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 312 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overi
351. vex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Adjusting Rear View Mirror A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Electric Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel To adjust the view in the outside mirrors turn the rotary knob to the left L center O or Right R position After selecting the mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center O position to gaurd against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Switch Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped NOTE The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable when the vehicle alarm is enabled NOTE The passenger vanity mirror will become inop erable if left on for more than 10 minutes 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing
352. violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on 328 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster Refer to Instru ment Cluster Description in Section 3 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 CAUTION VEHICLE LOADING Damage to the fuel system or emission control Vehicle Loading Capacities system could result from using an improper fuel Front Seat Occupants 0000 2 t
353. w less forceful deployment KNEE BOLSTER Si amp d ed The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protec tive covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretens
354. ward past the second detent EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Y NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Map Reading Lights Convertible When the ignition switch is in the ON position these lights located under the rearview mirror can be turned on by switches located at the base of the rearview mirror SWITCHES BS cebaan 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door or deck lid convertible is opened With the ignition key in the OFF position the interior lights will automatically turn off in about 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the Dome light position The interior lights will remain on for only 90 seconds for all occurrences after that until the engine is turned on and off Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights on the Multi Function Control Lever upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent
355. will decrease the top s drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains If stains persist contact your local dealership for further sugges tions 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner part number 05012245AA to the complete stain extending 2 inches 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft bristle brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before lowering it 7 Cloth Top Protection For appearance purposes you may wish to protect your Twillfast cloth top periodically Use Mopar Convert ible Cloth Top Treatment or a fabric protectant such as Scotchguard_ is suggested The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur Weather Strip Care Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi cally with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant part number 4773427 to keep them soft and pliable ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 INTEGRA
356. will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna The luggage rack if equipped should also not be positioned directly above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interr
357. witch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving it means that there is a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY 14 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out Fuller 15 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will come on for about six seconds A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor This is a reminder to buckle up If you do not buckle up the light will remain on 16 Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed See page 36 for more information 17 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound 18 Anti Lock Warning Light ABS If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock
358. wner s Manual Operator Manual 4 444 Paint Care cere ee e Eee Raed Che eae 395 Panel Rear Shelf 1x22 dg RR rr IRE puns 207 Panic Alarme 4 46 4 4 t erbe psg quest 26 33 Parking Brake sg esada eder eR Oe aa on 294 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 163 Passing Light 15 cocks hp e Rx 183 Personal Settings 232 Dets caor emus eive c pua en ete 79 113 Phone Cell lat reeta tenissinu kg RR 136 Phone Hands Free UConnect 136 Placard Tire and Loading Information 307 Power Deck Lid Release consergeria paaien tA 40 Distribution Center llli ringi 403 Door Locks i21 e Da p eae va 20 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 201 ci MC c 160 Steering usse pit Eg EE ed ha 299 378 Steering Checking lille 378 DUlFOO tite tigate era add tie ao wat ets 199 MWindOoWS osito eda ee eret Re pens 42 Power Steering Fluid 04 413 en INDEX 459 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 55 89 Preparation for Jacking 00 348 Pretensioners Seat Belts sca dde eae obey Bat ee 53 87 Programmable Electronic Features 194 198 232 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 27 34 194 198 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 eee eee 314 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 239 Radio Operation 0 240 248 266 Radio Satellite lt 4 cscs pu oe eR He a A 261 Radio Sound Systems
359. yed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Light WARNING You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail designed to be maintenance free if any of the following when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not occurs have an authorized dealer service the system there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring h 3 including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering immediately wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8 Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are mad
360. you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Seat Adjuster If Equipped WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 6 Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Power Seat Switch Recliner Control Lever This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to the rear of the power seat switch To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Lumbar lIf Equipped Folding Front Passenger Seat If Equipped The Lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to the driver s seat To increase support rotate the handle provide additional cargo space down To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat Lumba
361. you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the driver s front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration or title Vehicle Identification Number en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 045 13 Ignition Key Removal sss 13 Locking Doors With The Key 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 hound M PCT 15 Replacement Keys llle 16 Sentry Key Programming lesus 17 General Information lesse 17 ll Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 18 If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel i sce em bREESRG AEG ER EG 18 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 18 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System 18 li Door Locks noeh 18 Manual Door Locks 0000 0 18 Power Door Locks lessen 20 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear D
362. your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 and First gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pres CAUTION sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the Four Speed Automatic Transaxle speed Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The steering column must be unlocked and the gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be towed must not exceed 100 miles 160 km and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 km h If the transaxle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55km h With Ignition Key 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN more than 100 miles 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to the
363. ystem Sedan 24 Keys 24244097345 44022 reniy 04300044 13 Lane Change and Turn Signals 224 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 45 81 Latches Hood 3 cca ck asco kk ke re eres Res 177 Lead Fre Gasoline lle 322 Lite of Tires 3 4 os vias ERI ap RR IeRRESE EE 318 Liftgate Sedan ccs esa e b cay 38 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 186 Light Bulbs cR RR EE RE Rn Light sees HERO UR HE miosa dis Airbag iyonsedes eaa dor ee dere d Atit LOCK 4 2606 2686 rea eR eT Back UP iacu t ce RR Roe Ro o o ete Brake Warning d ewe ok eere teis Center Mounted Stop Daytime Running 0000 000s 456 INDEX BENE Dimmer Switch Headlight 181 Engine Temperature Warning 226 EOS olere hs Reon ne Re 183 227 409 Front Replacement 0000 408 Headlight Switch 0000 182 Headlights 12e eR Rr eens as 182 High Beam Indicator 0 4 228 Instrument Cluster 0 000 0 182 Interior sho ASP Ae 9E See ee ee E ees 180 Lights On Reminder suus 182 Low Fuel ss cceag aad ce e eR RES 227 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 224 Map Reading 4 Re Y 178 179 OI Pressure ud rose Bias E LEER uer 227 Rear Servicing 4 494 ERR S peri da eis 410 Seat Belt Reminder 04 226 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 36 DELVICE 4 acra race ep ER I ICE UA RC Rete 408 T

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LE RéCIT - Le Labo de l`économie sociale et solidaire  NICS News  manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file